Fujitronic Home Theater Screen UG520H x User Manual
FUJI UGx20 SERIES PROGRAMMABLE OPERATION DISPLAY  
USER'S MANUAL <HARDWARE>  
TYPE: UG520H-x  
UG420H-x  
UG320H-x  
UG221H-x  
UG220H-x  
FEH352c  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No te s o n Sa fe Use o f POD  
In this manual, you will find various notes categorized under the following levels with  
the signal words "DANGER," and "CAUTION."  
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,  
DANGER  
will result in death or serious injury.  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may  
CAUTION  
result in minor or moderate injury and could cause property damage.  
Note that there is a possibility that the item listed with  
ramifications.  
may have serious  
CAUTION  
DANGER  
Never use the input function of POD for operations that may threaten human life or to damage  
the system, such as switches to be used in case of emergency. Please design the system so  
that it can cope with malfunction of a touch switch.  
•
Turn off the power supply when you set up the unit, connect cables or perform maintenance  
and inspection. Failure to do so could cause an electric shock or damage to the unit.  
•
•
•
You must put a cover on the terminals on the unit when you turn the power on and operate  
the unit. Without the terminal cover in place, an electric shock may occur.  
The liquid crystal in the LCD panel is a hazardous substance. If the LCD panel is damaged,  
never swallow the leaked liquid crystal. If the liquid crystal spills on your skin or clothing, use  
soap and wash off thoroughly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No te s o n Sa fe Use o f POD  
CAUTION  
[Notes on System Design]  
Never bundle control cables and input/output cables with high-voltage and large-current  
carrying cables such as power supply cables. Keep these cables at least 200 mm away from  
the power supply or high-voltage cables. Otherwise, malfunction may occur due to noise.  
•
•
For use in a nuclear energy facility, or other facility of such official importance, please consult  
your local distributor.  
[Notes on Installation]  
Operate (or store) POD under the conditions indicated in this manual and related manuals.  
Failure to do so could cause fire, malfunction, physical damage or deterioration.  
•
•
Understand the following environmental limits for use and storage of POD. Otherwise, fire or  
damage to the unit may result.  
-Avoid locations where there is a possibility that water, corrosive gas, flammable gas,  
solvents, grinding fluids or cutting oil can come into contact with the unit.  
-Avoid high temperature, high humidity, and outside weather conditions, such as wind, rain  
or direct sunlight.  
-Avoid locations where excessive dust, salt, and metallic particles are present.  
-Avoid installing the unit in a location where vibration or physical shock may be transmitted.  
Equipment must be correctly mounted so that the main terminal of POD will not be touched  
inadvertently.  
•
•
Tighten the POD mounting screws to the specified torque. Excessive tightening may distort the  
panel surface. Loose tightening may cause POD to come off, malfunction or be short-circuited.  
Tighten terminal screws on the power input terminal block equally to a torque of 0.5 Nom.  
•
•
Check the appearance of POD when it is unpacked. Do not use the unit if any damage or  
deformation is found.  
POD has a glass screen. Do not drop or give physical shock to the unit.  
•
•
[Notes on Cable Connection]  
Connect the cables correctly to the terminals of POD in accordance with the specified voltage  
and wattage. Over-voltage, over-wattage or incorrect cable connection could cause fire,  
malfunction or damage to the unit.  
Be sure to establish a ground of POD. The FG terminal must be used exclusively for the unit  
with the level of grounding resistance less than 100W.  
•
•
Prevent any conductive particles from entering into POD. Failure to do so may lead to fire,  
damage or malfunction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No te s o n Sa fe Use o f POD  
CAUTION  
[Notes on Maintenance and Operation]  
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. is not responsible for any damages resulting from repair, overhaul or  
modification of POD that was performed by an unauthorized person.  
•
•
Do not use thinners for cleaning because they may discolor the POD surface. Use alcohol or  
benzine commercially available.  
Do not use a sharp-pointed tool when pressing a touch switch.  
•
•
Only experts are authorized to set up the unit, connect the cables or perform maintenance  
and inspection.  
If a data receive error occurs when POD and the counterpart (PLC, temperature controller,  
etc.) are started at the same time, read the manual for the counterpart unit and handle the  
error correctly.  
•
Switch resolution of the POD UG20 series is determined by the analog-type resistance film.  
Do not press two or more positions on the screen at  
•
SYSTEM  
the same time.  
F1  
F2  
If two or more positions are pressed at the same time,  
F3  
F4  
the switch located between the pressed positions  
F5  
SWITCH  
F6  
activates. Please take note of this.  
POWER  
Avoid displaying the same patterns for hours. It may  
•
•
cause afterimages due to the property of LCD display.  
If you use the fixed patterns for hours, use the auto-  
OFF function of the backlight.  
Pressing two positions at the same time  
activates the swith in the center.  
[Notes on Disposal]  
At the time of disposal, POD must be treated as industrial waste.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re visio n  
*Manual No. is shown on cover.  
Printed on  
*Manual No.  
Revision contents  
First edition  
October , 1999  
April , 2001  
FEH352  
FH352a  
Second edition  
New Product (UG221) specification added.  
The following PLC model is added.  
Mitsubishi  
QnH series  
FX1S series  
Allen-Bradley  
Siemens  
Modicon  
Micro Logix 1000  
S7-300/400 MPI  
Modbus RTU  
Others , contents check  
November , 2002 FEH352b  
Third edition  
The following PLC model is added.  
SAIA  
PCD  
MOELLER  
PS4  
Telemecanique  
Automationdirect  
TSX Micro  
Direct LOGIC  
Toyo Denki  
uGPC sx series  
Others , contents check  
May , 2003  
FEH352c  
Fourth edition  
The following PLC model is added.  
VIGOR M series  
DELTA  
DVP series  
BADOR Mint  
Appendix : Ladder Transfer Function  
Others , contents check  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co nte nts  
Preface  
Not es on Safe Use of POD  
Revision  
1 . Hardware Specificat ion s  
1. Special Featu res .......................................................................................................... 1-1  
2. Notes on Usage ............................................................................................................ 1-2  
3. System Com position .................................................................................................... 1-4  
4. Nam es of Com pon en ts ................................................................................................ 1-11  
5. Dim en sion s an d Pan el Cu t-ou t ................................................................................... 1-13  
6. Mou n tin g Procedu re ................................................................................................... 1-18  
7. Wirin g ........................................................................................................................ 1-19  
8. Specification s ............................................................................................................. 1-21  
9. Serial Con n ector (CN1) ............................................................................................... 1-27  
10. Settin g of Dip Switch es .............................................................................................. 1-29  
11. Modu lar J ack 1 & 2 ................................................................................................... 1-30  
12. Bar Code Reader In terface .......................................................................................... 1-31  
13. Prin ter In terface (CN2) ............................................................................................... 1-32  
14. Video In terface ........................................................................................................... 1-33  
15. An alog RGB In pu t ...................................................................................................... 1-34  
16. Con n ection ................................................................................................................ 1-37  
17. Operation of POD Main Men u ..................................................................................... 1-42  
18. Fu n ction Switch es ...................................................................................................... 1-59  
2 . Con n ect ion t o Lin k Un it s  
1. FUJ I PLC • 1 ................................................................................................................ 2-1  
2. FUJ I PLC • 2 ................................................................................................................ 2-4  
3. FUJ I PLC • 3 ................................................................................................................ 2-6  
4. FUJ I PLC • 4 ................................................................................................................ 2-8  
5. FUJ I PLC • 5 .............................................................................................................. 2-11  
6. FUJ I PLC • 6 .............................................................................................................. 2-14  
7. MITSUBISHI PLC • 1 .................................................................................................. 2-16  
8. MITSUBISHI PLC • 2 .................................................................................................. 2-22  
9. MITSUBISHI PLC • 3 .................................................................................................. 2-26  
10. MITSUBISHI PLC • 4 .................................................................................................. 2-28  
11. MITSUBISHI PLC • 5 .................................................................................................. 2-32  
12. MITSUBISHI PLC • 6 .................................................................................................. 2-35  
13. OMRON PLC • 1 ......................................................................................................... 2-37  
14. OMRON PLC • 2 ......................................................................................................... 2-42  
15. Sh arp PLC • 1 ............................................................................................................ 2-43  
16. Sh arp PLC • 2 ............................................................................................................ 2-46  
17. HITACHI PLC • 1 ........................................................................................................ 2-48  
18. HITACHI PLC • 2 ........................................................................................................ 2-51  
19. Matsu sh ita PLC ......................................................................................................... 2-54  
20. YOKOGAWA PLC • 1 ................................................................................................... 2-57  
21. YOKOGAWA PLC • 2 ................................................................................................... 2-59  
22. YASKAWA PLC • 1 ...................................................................................................... 2-62  
23. YASKAWA PLC • 2 ...................................................................................................... 2-65  
24. TOYOPUC PLC ........................................................................................................... 2-67  
25. Koyo PLC ................................................................................................................... 2-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co nte nts  
26. Allen -Bradley PLC • 1 ................................................................................................. 2-75  
27. Allen -Bradley PLC • 2 ................................................................................................. 2-80  
28. GE Fan u c PLC • 1 ...................................................................................................... 2-84  
29. GE Fan u c PLC • 2 ...................................................................................................... 2-86  
30. TOSHIBA PLC ............................................................................................................ 2-88  
31. TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC ............................................................................................ 2-90  
32. SIEMENS PLC • 1 ...................................................................................................... 2-92  
33. SIEMENS PLC • 2 ...................................................................................................... 2-94  
34. SIEMENS PLC • 3 ...................................................................................................... 2-96  
35. SIEMENS PLC • 4 ...................................................................................................... 2-97  
36. SIEMENS PLC • 5 ...................................................................................................... 2-99  
37. SIEMENS PLC • 6 .................................................................................................... 2-101  
38. Sh in ko PLC .............................................................................................................. 2-103  
39. SAMSUNG PLC ........................................................................................................ 2-105  
40. KEYENCE PLC • 1 .................................................................................................... 2-107  
41. KEYENCE PLC • 2 .................................................................................................... 2-109  
42. KEYENCE PLC • 3 .................................................................................................... 2-112  
43. LG PLC .................................................................................................................... 2-114  
44. FANUC PLC .............................................................................................................. 2-119  
45. FATEK PLC .............................................................................................................. 2-121  
46. IDEC PLC ................................................................................................................. 2-123  
47. MODICON PLC ......................................................................................................... 2-125  
48. YAMATAKE PLC ....................................................................................................... 2-126  
49. TAIAN PLC ............................................................................................................... 2-128  
50. SAIA PLC ................................................................................................................. 2-130  
51. MOELLER PLC ......................................................................................................... 2-132  
52. Telem ecan iqu e PLC .................................................................................................. 2-133  
53. Au tom ation direct PLC .............................................................................................. 2-134  
54. VIGOR PLC .............................................................................................................. 2-137  
55. DELTA PLC .............................................................................................................. 2-139  
56. BALDOR PLC ........................................................................................................... 2-141  
57. TOYO DENKI PLC .................................................................................................... 2-143  
3 . Han dlin g of Periph eral Equ ipm en t  
1. Con n ectin g th e UG00P-U1 ............................................................................................. 3-1  
2. Con n ectin g th e UG00P-U2 ............................................................................................. 3-3  
3. Con n ectin g th e Mem ory Card Recorder .......................................................................... 3-6  
4. Con n ectin g th e Mem ory Exten sion Un it ......................................................................... 3-9  
5. Con n ectin g Com m u n ication In terface .......................................................................... 3-12  
6. Con n ectin g Du al Port In terface .................................................................................... 3-15  
7. How to Replace th e Backligh t Un it ............................................................................... 3-19  
UG520H-V ................................................................................................................. 3-20  
UG420H-V ................................................................................................................. 3-26  
UG420H-T ................................................................................................................. 3-31  
UG420H-S ................................................................................................................. 3-36  
UG320 ....................................................................................................................... 3-41  
UG320HD .................................................................................................................. 3-48  
UG220 ....................................................................................................................... 3-53  
Appen dix  
Ladder Tran sfer Fu n ction ..................................................................................... Appen dix-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware  
Specifications  
1. Sp e c ia l Fe a ture s  
2. No te s o n Usa g e  
3. Syste m Co m p o sitio n  
4. Na m e s o f Co m p o ne nts  
5. Dim e nsio ns a nd Pa ne l Cut-o ut  
6. Mo unting Pro c e d ure  
7. Wiring  
8. Sp e c ific a tio ns  
9. Se ria l Co nne c to r (CN1)  
10. Se tting o f Dip Switc he s  
11. Mo d ula r Ja c k 1 & 2  
12. Ba r Co d e Re a d e r Inte rfa c e  
13. Printe r Inte rfa c e (CN2)  
14. Vid e o Inte rfa c e  
15. Ana lo g RGB Inp ut  
16. Co nne c tio n  
17. Op e ra tio n o f POD Ma in Me nu  
18. Func tio n Switc he s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Special Features  
1 - 1  
Sp e c ia l Fe a ture s  
1
1) 128-color Display  
128-color display which makes colorful expression possible is realized. Not only drawings but also bitmap  
files are clearly displayed. (UG221 and UG220 is 16-color display.)  
2) Data Sheet Printing Function  
It is possible to make the original data sheet screen by the panel editor (= the editing software).  
Daily reports or monthly reports that the operator must fill out can be printed in an instant.  
3) Sampling Function  
This function makes it possible to store the sampling data in an IC card. The stored data can be edited  
easily by a personal computer. It can be used widely in various fields.  
4) Macro Function  
With this function, UGx20 series can make programs which previously had to be produced by PLC.  
5) Multi Window Function  
Up to three windows can be displayed simultaneously on a screen.  
It is easy to move or delete the displayed windows.  
6) Video Function  
UGx20 series can be connected to a video or a CCD camera, and the image which is taken by a video or  
a camera can be displayed directly in a screen of UGx20 series.  
7) UG221, UG220  
A 5.7 inch display with 320 240 dot resolution.  
8) UG320  
A 7.7 inch display with VGA (640 480 dot resolution).  
9) UG420  
A 10.4 inch standard model display which uses the previous screen data.  
10)UG520  
A 12.1 inch large display with SVGA (800 600 dot resolution).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Notes on Usage  
1 - 2  
No te s o n Usa g e  
2
5. Never install POD in a place where impacts or  
Environm e nta l Lim its  
vibrations may be transmitted.  
1. Use POD at an ambient temperature of 0 to  
50ºC, and a relative humidity of 35-85 %RH.  
(But, a UG420 STN multi-color display can be  
used at 0 to 40ºC.)  
0 to 50°C  
50  
40  
30  
6. Avoid any place in which there is the possibility  
that water, corrosive gas, flammable gas,  
solvents or coolants, grinding oil can come in  
contact with the unit. Never install the unit in a  
place where dust, salt and metallic particles are  
present.  
20  
10  
0
2. Install a forced fan or an air conditioner to  
maintain the ambient temperature when it is  
higher than the above mentioned range.  
Fan  
YOUZAI  
Vent  
Loc a tions  
3. Avoid places where moisture may easily  
condense due to sudden temperature changes.  
1. Secure sufficient space around POD for  
ventilation.  
4. Avoid direct sunlight.  
2. Never attach POD to the top of any apparatus  
generating high levels of heat (heater,  
ransformer, large-capacity resistor, etc.).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Notes on Usage  
1 - 3  
3. Never install POD in the same compartment as  
high-voltage equipment. The unit should be at  
least 200 mm away from high-voltage lines or  
power cables.  
4. Securely fasten and lock every connector for  
each cable. Double-check this before turning the  
power on.  
5. In a dry environment, POD may generate a large  
amount of static electricity.  
Therefore, before touching the unit, touch a  
grounded metallic section to discharge the static  
electricity.  
Usa g e  
1. An emergency stop circuit must be composed of  
an external relay circuit with a start signal for  
POD built in. Do not create switches on POD to  
be used in case of emergency.  
6. Application of thinner may discolor POD. Use  
alcohol or benzine available commercially for  
cleaning.  
Switch to be used  
in emergency  
BENZINE  
Alcohol  
Emergency  
Stop  
7. Never remove any printed circuit board from  
POD. (This will harm the unit.)  
2. POD has a glass screen. Never drop or subject  
the unit to strong impacts.  
8. Never operate the display by using a tool with a  
sharp point like a screwdriver.  
3. Tighten mounting screws with the following  
torques.  
Touch the display by fingers.  
Screw  
Screw Size  
Torque (N•m)  
Type  
UG320/220  
UG221  
M3  
M4  
M4  
0.3 to 0.5  
0.3 to 0.5  
0.5 to 0.7  
UG520/420  
Note :Never fasten these screws too tightly,  
otherwise the cover of POD may be deformed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 System Composition  
1 - 4  
Syste m Co m p o sitio n  
3
System Composition / Model Indication / Peripheral Equipment  
Syst em Com posit ion  
The following illustration shows possible system configurations using UG20.  
Panel Editor  
for UG series  
run  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
s
t
o
p
During operation  
(Link communication)  
RS-232C/RS-422  
Transferring  
screen data  
UG00C-T  
Creating screens  
UG03I-x  
Link Unit  
UG00S-CW  
During operation  
Personal Computer (PC)  
UGx20  
(TLink/OPCN-1/SXBus/ProfiBus/Ethernet)  
Transferring  
screen data  
Transferring  
screen data  
or  
During operation  
(Universal serial  
communication)  
RS-232C/RS-422  
UG00C-T  
Memory manager  
/Data logging  
Exclusive Cable  
Universal-purpose  
computer  
Printer Cable  
UG00C-C  
Card Recorder  
2
*
Video / CCD camera  
1
UG00P-MR  
*
Cable  
UG00C-B  
Bar Code Reader  
Cable  
Printer  
P
V
UG00C-H  
S
V
○
A
T
○
OU  
T1  
○
S
E
OU  
T2  
T
○
AL  
M1  
R
/
○
A
LM  
S
2
or  
Temperature Controller  
UG00C-B  
1 UG00P-MR is optional.  
*
*
2 The interface for video function (using only in UG520 and UG420) is optional for Maker.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 System Composition  
1 - 5  
List of Models  
The characters on the right of model names represent optional features and special specifications.  
UG220H  
-
Power requirements  
4 : 24V DC  
Interface specifications  
Main unit  
C : Serial (Link Unit Communication)  
(Other interfaces can be supported using the I/F unit.)  
LCD type  
S : STN color LCD  
L : Monochrome LCD (White mode)  
UG221H  
-
Touch Panel Specifications  
D
: Matrix sw type  
None : Analog sw type  
Main unit  
Power requirements  
4 : 24V DC  
Interface specifications  
C : Serial (Link Unit Communication)  
(Other interfaces can be supported using the I/F unit.)  
LCD type  
T : TFT color LCD  
S : STN color LCD  
L : Monochrome LCD (Blue mode)  
UG320H  
-
Power requirements  
4 : 24V DC  
Interface specifications  
Main unit  
C : Serial (Link Unit Communication)  
(Other interfaces can be supported using the I/F unit.)  
LCD type  
S : STN color LCD  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 System Composition  
1 - 6  
UG420H  
-
Image input  
NONE  
1 : Video interface (TFT color LCD Only)  
2 : RGB interface (TFT VGA only)  
Main unit  
Memory card  
None : Standard (Outside recorder)  
M : Memory card interface  
Power requirements  
1 : 100 to 200V AC  
4 : 24V DC  
Interface specifications  
C : Serial (Link Unit Communication)  
(Other interfaces can be supported using the I/F unit.)  
LCD type  
S : STN color LCD  
T : TFT color LCD VGA  
V : TFT color LCD SVGA  
UG520H  
-
Image input  
NONE  
1 : Video interface (TFT color LCD Only)  
Main unit  
Memory card  
None : Standard (Outside recorder)  
M : Memory card interface  
Power requirements  
1 : 100 to 200V AC  
4 : 24V DC  
Interface specifications  
C : Serial (Link Unit Communication)  
(Other interfaces can be supported using the I/F unit.)  
LCD type  
V : TFT color LCD SVGA  
E.g. : UG220H-LC4 (Monochrome LCD / Serial / 24V DC)  
UG320H-SC4 (STN color LCD / Serial / 24V DC)  
UG420H-TC1M1 (TFT color LCD VGA / Serial /100 to 200V AC / Memory card interface / Video interface)  
UG520H-VC41 (TFT color LCD SVGA / Serial / 24V DC / Standard / Video interface)  
Produ ct s con form in g t o overseas st an dards  
For the products that conform to overseas standards, such as CE marking, please contact Fuji Sales  
Department.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 System Composition  
1 - 7  
List of Opt ion s  
Type  
UG220  
UG221  
UG320 UG420H-S UG420H-T UG420H-V UG520H-V  
Item  
1
*
Card Interface  
Video Interface  
Analog RGB Input  
Interface  
Extension I/O Unit : UG00P-U1  
2
*
(16 inputs / 16 outputs)  
Serial Extension I/O : UG00P-U2  
2
*
(16 inputs / 16 outputs)  
UG00P-D4  
Extension Memory  
Cassette: (4Mbyte)  
UG221P-D4  
UG00P-SR  
SRAM Cassette  
: (512Kbyte)  
UG221P-SR  
Communication Interface Unit  
: UG03I-S/J/T/C/E/P  
3
3
*
Communication Interface Unit  
: UG02I-S/J/T  
*
Card Recorder  
: UG00P-MR  
1
*
Terminal Converter  
: UG00P-TC  
1 Prepare for UGx20 with card interface, or UGx20 and UG00P-MR (card recorder).  
2 UG00P-U1 : Rear-side installation I/O unit, UG00P-U2 : Panel-side installation I/O unit  
3 UG03I-T/UG02I-T : T-LINK, UG03I-J/UG02I-J : OPCN-1, UG03I-S/UG02I-S : SX BUS,  
UG03I-C : CC-LINK, UG03I-E(2) : Ethernet or FL-net, UG03I-P : PROFIBUS  
*
*
*
Mem ory Card  
A SRAM card or FPROM card can be used for the memory card. The following table shows the  
difference between the SRAM card and FPROM card:  
SRAM  
FROM  
Supports the functions of POD memory manager and  
data logging, and transmission of screen data.  
Supports transmission of screen data.  
Data is partially readable and writable at any time.  
Data is written and read all together. Data cannot be  
written or read partially.  
Contains a battery. Replace the battery when it runs  
out.  
No battery replacement is required.  
The FROM card cannot support any functions of memory manager and data logging.  
*
The following memory cards supplied from Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. are recommended.  
SRAM  
UG00K-S25K(256K)  
UG00K-S51K(512K)  
UG00K-S01M(1M)  
FROM  
UG00K-S02M(2M)  
UG00K-S04M(4M)  
UG00K-F25K(256K)  
UG00K-F51K(512K)  
UG00K-F01M(1M)  
UG00K-F02M(2M)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 System Composition  
1 - 8  
Model In dicat ion  
UG2 2 1 , UG2 2 0  
Display area : 115.2 86.4 mm  
(A 5.7 inch display.)  
UG3 2 0  
Display area : 157.4 118.1 mm  
(A 7.7 inch display.)  
UG4 2 0  
Display area : 211.2 158.4 mm  
(A 10.4 inch display.)  
UG5 2 0  
Display area : 246.0 184.5 mm  
(A 12.1 inch display.)  
Periph eral Equ ipm en t  
The following options are available for using UGx20 series more effectively.  
UG0 0 S-CWV3  
(Pan el Edit or for Win dows9 8 / NT4 .0 / Me/ 2 0 0 0 / XP)  
Application software for editing display data for UG series.  
UG0 0 C-T (Dat a Tran sfer Cable) 3 m  
Connects UGx20 to a personal computer, or a personal computer to  
UG00P-MR.  
UG0 0 C-C (Prin t er Cable) 2 .5 m  
Connects UGx20 to a printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 System Composition  
1 - 9  
UG0 0 P-D4 •UG2 2 1 P-D4 (FPROM Casset t e)  
•
•
UG00P-D4  
: for UG520, UG420, UG320  
FROM0  
1
1
M
N
C
O
R
F
1
P
UG221P-D4 : for UG221  
J
Extension print circuit board to extend the memory for display data back-up.  
There is 4Mbyte type.  
UG0 0 P-SR•UG2 2 1 P-SR (SRAM Casset t e)  
•
•
UG00P-SR : for UG520, UG420, UG320  
UG221P-SR : for UG221  
1
N
2
-
C
2
7
1
2
0
P
Extension print circuit board to back-up the memory for sampling data,  
Internal Memory and Memo Pad. There is 512kbyte type. It is also possible to  
set the calendar for displaying in UGx20 at this cassette.  
SANYO  
+
CR2430  
-
S
UG0 0 P-MR (Card Recorder)  
Reads display data created by personal computer, or works as an external  
memory storage system for the memory manager and data logging functions.  
UG0 0 P-MSE (Mem ory Card Edit or)  
Application software for editing data stored in a memory card.  
( For Windows 98 / Me / NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP )  
UG0 0 P-TC (Term in al Con vert er)  
C N 1  
S
Used for connection between a UGx20 and a PLC at the RS-422/485 terminal  
block.  
W
1
T
B
1
UG0 0 P-U1 (Ext en sion I/ O Un it )  
Used as an external I/O unit for PLC. It has 16 inputs and 16 outputs.  
(It can be used for UG520 and UG420.)  
UG0 0 P-U2 (Serial Ext en sion I/ O Un it )  
Used as an external I/O unit for PLC. It has 16 inputs and 16 outputs.  
(It can be used for UG520,UG420,UG320,UG221 and UG220.)  
DC  
24  
V
IN  
1
FG  
IN  
3
I
N5  
I
M
J1  
IN0  
N7  
IN  
2
I
IN  
9
I
N4  
N1  
1
IN6  
I
N1  
I
3
IN8  
IN  
15  
IN  
10  
IN1  
2
OUT  
1
N14  
O
UT  
CO  
3
M+  
OU  
T5  
OU  
T0  
OU  
T7  
OU  
T2  
OU  
T8  
OU  
T4  
OU  
T1  
OU  
T6  
0
O
UT  
12  
CO  
M1  
OU  
T1  
OU  
T9  
4
C
OM  
OU  
T1  
2
1
OU  
T1  
3
OU  
T1  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 System Composition  
1 - 10  
UG0 3 I-x [x:T  
x:E(2 ) Et h ern et •FL-n et , x:C  
x:P PROFIBUS  
T-Lin k , x:J  
OPCN-1 , x:S  
SX BUS,  
CC-Lin k ,  
]
(Com m u n icat ion In t erface Un it )  
Used to communicate with each network.  
It makes it possible to connect multiple UGx20 series to a PLC. This system,  
which enables other devices to connect to the same network, brings about  
the reduction in costs of the whole system.  
UG0 2 I-x  
[x:T  
T LINK, x:J  
OPCN-1 , x:S  
SX BUS]  
(Com m u n icat ion In t erface Un it )  
Used for UG220 to communicate with each network.  
UG0 0 P-DI (ACPU/ Qn ACPU/ FXCPU Du al Port In t er-  
face)  
P
P
G
Add-on connector with two ports, specifically designed for the connector on  
the MITSUBISHI’s ACPU/QnACPU/FXCPU programmer. This can improve  
operability of the ACPU/QnACPU/FXCPU programmer that is directly  
connected.  
G
D
UGx2 0 P-PS  
[x:2  
5
UG2 2 0 ,UG2 2 1 , 3  
UG3 2 0 , 4  
UG4 2 0 ,  
UG5 2 0 ] (Prot ect ion Sh eet )  
Protects the operation panel surface. Five sheets are included in one  
package.  
UG0 0 C-B (bar-code reader (t em perat u re con t roller)  
con n ect in g cable) 3 m  
Used to connect a bar-code reader to the POD.  
Also used to connect a temperature controller to the POD via RS-232C.  
UG0 0 C-H (Mu lt i-lin k 2 (t em perat u re con t roller)  
con n ect in g cable) 3 m  
Used to connect between POD master and POD slave for Multi-link 2  
connection.  
Also used to connect a temperature controller to the POD via RS-485.POD  
slave station in the Multi-Link 2 connection.  
UGxxP-Bx [UG2 2 0 P/ 3 2 0 P/ 4 2 0 P/ 5 2 0 P-Bx]  
(Back ligh t for Replacem en t )  
Placement backlight parts for UGx20 series.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Names of Components  
1 - 11  
Na m e s o f Co m p o ne nts  
4
Fron t Side of UG2 2 0  
Rear Side of UG2 2 0  
10  
1
13  
(+)  
-)  
DC24V  
(
3
5
8
1
C
N
N
C
2
MJ2  
MJ1  
4
9
7
2
1
Fron t Side of UG2 2 1  
Rear Side of UG2 2 1  
10  
8
1
24VDC  
9
3
11  
5
MJ2  
MJ1  
7
CN1  
CN2  
2
4
6
1
Fron t Side of UG3 2 0  
Rear Side of UG3 2 0  
10  
1
13  
(+)  
-)  
5
DC24V  
(
MJ2  
MJ1  
3
4
1
N
C
8
9
CN2  
11  
7
2
1
1
8
Mounting holes for fixtures  
Dip switches  
2
9
Display  
MJ1, 2: for data transfer, for temperature  
3
4
5
controller, for bar-code reader, for UG00P-MR  
and for UG00P-U2 (option)  
Function keys (Refer to P1-59)  
Power lamp  
10  
11  
DC power supply  
for UG00P-D4 (option)  
CN1: for PLC (RS-232C, RS-422)  
6
7
for UG03I-S/J/T/C/E/P (option)  
CN2: for printer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Names of Components  
1 - 12  
Fron t Side of UG4 2 0  
Rear Side of UG4 2 0  
1
6
11  
L
100-  
240VAC  
N
NC  
12  
3
15  
8
13  
14  
1
N
C
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN2  
7
2
1
10  
9
4
Fron t Side of UG5 2 0  
Rear Side of UG5 2 0  
1
11  
6
L
100-  
240VAC  
N
NC  
12  
15  
13  
14  
1
8
N
C
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN2  
7
2
10  
1
9
3
4
1
9
Mounting holes for fixtures  
MJ1, 2: for data transfer, for temperature  
2
3
4
controller, for bar-code reader, for UG00P-MR  
and for UG00P-U2 (option)  
Display  
Function keys (Refer to P1-59)  
Power lamp  
10  
11  
for UG00P-D2/D4 (option)  
for video (option)  
AC power supply / DC power supply  
CN1: for PLC (RS-232C, RS-422)  
CN2: for printer  
5
6
7
8
for UG03I-S/J/T/C/E/P (option)  
12  
13  
14  
for UG00P-U1 (option)  
Card interface (option)  
Dip switches  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Dimensions and Panel Cut-out  
1 - 13  
Dim e nsio ns a nd Pa ne l Cut-o ut  
5
Dim en sion s of UG2 2 0  
Unit : mm  
Top View  
173.6  
Rear View  
CN1  
CN2  
MJ2  
MJ1  
Front View  
Side View  
117.2  
182.5  
Pan el Cu t -ou t of UG2 2 0  
Unit : mm  
+0.5  
174 - 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Dimensions and Panel Cut-out  
1 - 14  
Dim en sion s of UG2 2 1  
Unit : mm  
Side View  
Front View  
SYSTEM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
POWER  
182.5  
Rear View  
Under View  
+
24V DC  
-
Do not remove this seal.  
unless the optional unit is mounted.  
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN1  
CN2  
Pan el Cu t -ou t of UG2 2 1  
Unit : mm  
0.5  
0
174 +-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Dimensions and Panel Cut-out  
1 - 15  
Dim en sion s of UG3 2 0  
Unit : mm  
Top View  
220  
Rear View  
TB1  
(+)  
DC 24V  
(
)
MJ2 MJ1  
CN2  
Front View  
Side View  
160  
230  
Pan el Cu t -ou t of UG3 2 0  
Unit : mm  
+0.5  
- 0  
220.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Dimensions and Panel Cut-out  
1 - 16  
Dim en sion s of UG4 2 0  
Unit : mm  
Top View  
288  
Rear View  
L
100-  
240VAC  
N
NC  
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN2  
Front View  
Side View  
211  
310  
Pan el Cu t -ou t of UG4 2 0  
Unit : mm  
+0.5  
289 - 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Dimensions and Panel Cut-out  
1 - 17  
Dim en sion s of UG5 2 0  
Unit : mm  
Top View  
312  
Rear View  
L
100-  
240VAC  
N
NC  
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN2  
Front View  
Side View  
247  
334  
Pan el Cu t -ou t of UG5 2 0  
Unit : mm  
+0.5  
313 - 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Mounting Procedure  
1 - 18  
Mo unting Pro c e d ure  
6
Mou n t in g Procedu re  
1
Cut out the mounting panel (Max. thick: 3.2 mm) to match the dimensions shown below.  
Mounting panel  
Unit : mm  
+0.5  
+0.5  
220.5  
-
0
174 -  
0
Cut-out  
UG220  
UG221  
UG320  
+0.5  
+0.5  
289 -  
0
313 -  
0
UG420  
UG520  
2
Insert the fixtures attached to UGx20 into the mounting holes on UGx20. Tighten them with the locking  
screws. (Number of the fixtures: all series 4 pcs,)  
Fixture  
Dimensions of Fixtures  
Mounting panel  
(Unit : mm)  
Mounting hole  
10.5  
Mounting hole  
17.8  
for UG220/320  
UGx20  
1
B
T
)
(+  
V
(-  
4
2
C
D
)
1
J
M
2
J
M
10.5  
17.8  
for UG221/420/520  
torque:  
UG320/UG221/UG220  
UG520/UG420  
0.3 to 0.5 N • m  
0.5 to 0.7 N • m  
3
The waterproof packing mounted on the UG221 main unit shall come in close contact with the mounting  
panel so that it is surely caught between the mounting panel and UG221.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Wiring  
1 - 19  
Wiring  
7
Caution  
Do not remove the dust-proof seal till you finish wiring in the panel. If the seal is removed, conductor chips or other  
•
•
foreign matter may enter the device to cause failure.  
When you finished wiring in the panel, be sure to remove the dust-proof seal.  
Elect rical Wirin g  
Connects the cable for power supply to TB1 on the rear side of UGx20.  
(+)  
DC24V  
(-)  
TB1  
MJ2  
MJ1  
Power supply  
24V ±10% DC  
(+)  
24V DC  
1
N
(
-)  
C
CN2  
Earth  
UG320/UG221/UG220  
Type : 24V DC  
L
Type : 100-200V AC  
TB1  
100-  
240VAC  
N
NC  
TB1  
+
L
Power supply  
24V ±10% DC  
Power supply  
100-200VAC  
24VDC  
1
N
C
-
N
MJ2  
MJ1  
NC  
NC  
CN2  
Earth  
Earth  
UG520/UG420  
Screw  
Screw Size  
M3.5  
Torque (N • m)  
0.5  
Clamp Terminal (Unit : mm)  
7.0MAX  
Type  
UG320/UG221/UG220  
UG520/UG420  
7.0MAX  
8.0MAX  
M3.5  
0.5  
8.0MAX  
When TB1 is used for wiring, refer to the following table.  
The power source used must be within the allowable voltage fluctuation.  
Use a power source with low noise between the cables or ground and the cable.  
Use as thick a power cable as possible to minimize any drop in voltage.  
Keep cables of 100V AC and 24V DC sufficiently away from high-voltage, large-current cables.  
Not es on Usage of UG5 2 0 / UG4 2 0 1 0 0 -2 0 0 V AC Specificat ion s  
Generally, an isolating transformer improves noise resistance. However, if the display unit is far away  
from the secondary port of the transformer and noise gets mixed in, an isolating transformer becomes  
unnecessary.  
If any power voltage fluctuation caused by noise is expected, it is recommended that a voltage stabilizer  
be used.  
Insulation transformer  
Power Supply  
to UG520/UG420  
or  
Stabilized transformer  
2
1.25mm  
twisted  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Wiring  
1 - 20  
Grou n din g  
Th is equ ipm en t m u st be eart h ed.  
other  
equipment  
UGx20  
An independent earth pole shall be used for POD. (The  
level of grounding resistance should be less than 100 Ω.)  
Use a cable which has a nominal cross section of more than  
2mm2 for grounding.  
Grounding point shall be near the POD to shorten the  
distance of grounding wires.  
Grounding resistance : less than 100Ω  
Wirin g for Com m u n icat ion  
Never place the communication  
cable with electric circuits.  
Wiring duct  
Communication cable  
Communication cable  
Never bundle these cables together  
with other wires in ducts or electric  
boxes using cord locks. Although it  
is tempting to bundle all the cables  
Power cable and control cable  
neatly together, this does not  
Power cable and control cable  
Cord lock  
necessarily lead to a noise-resistant  
configuration.  
It is recommended that the  
communication cable be independently wired.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Specifications  
1 - 21  
Sp e c ific a tio ns  
8
General Specifications  
Type  
UG221  
UG220  
UG320  
Item  
Rated Voltage  
Permissible Range  
of Voltage  
24V DC  
24V ± 10% DC  
Permissible Momentary Power Failure  
Demand  
10ms or less  
20W or less  
10W or less  
15A  
Rushed Electric Current  
15A  
1ms  
1.5ms  
With-stand voltage  
Insulation Resistance  
Ambient Temperature  
Storage Ambient Temperature  
Ambient Humidity  
Dust  
DC external terminals to FG : 500V AC per min.  
500V DC, 10MΩ or more  
°
°
+
0 C to 50 C  
°
°
+
-
10 C to 60 C  
85% RH or less (without dew condensation)  
No conductive dust  
Solvent Resistance  
Corrosive Gas  
No cutting oil or no organic solvent to cling to the unit  
No corrosive gas  
Vibration frequency: 10 to 150Hz, Acceleration: 9.8m/s2,  
Single amplitude:0.075mm ,3 directions of X, Y and Z: one hour  
Pulse shape: Sine half wave,  
Vibration Resistance  
Shock Resistance  
Peak acceleration: 147m/s2, 3 directions of X, Y and Z: six times  
Noise voltage: 1500Vp-p, noise width: 1µs  
Contact: 6kV , Air: 8kV  
Noise Resistance  
Static Electricity Discharge Resistance  
Grounding  
Grounding resistance: less than 100Ω  
Structure  
Protection structure: front panel complies with IP65 (when using gasket)  
rear panel complies with IP20  
Form: in a body  
Mounting procedure: inserted in a mounting panel  
Cooling System  
Weight  
Cooling naturally  
Approx. 0.8kg  
Approx. 0.8kg  
Approx. 1.1kg  
230 75 66.1  
220.5+0.5 165.5+0.5  
1
*
Dimensions W  
H
D (mm)  
182.5 138.8 50  
182.5 138.8 57.3  
1
+0.5  
-0  
+0.5  
-0  
+0.5  
-0  
+0.5  
-0  
Panel Cut-out (mm)  
Case Color  
174  
131  
174  
131  
2
-0  
-0  
DARK GREY  
PC/ABS  
BLACK  
*
DARK GREY  
PC/ABS  
Material  
PC/PS  
1 including 4mm, the size of boss for communication unit  
*
2 equivalent to the Munsell color system N-2.0  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Specifications  
1 - 22  
UG420  
UG520  
Type  
AC Power Supply DC Power Supply AC PowerSupply DC Power Supply  
Item  
Rated Voltage  
Permissible Range  
of Voltage  
24V DC  
100/240V AC  
85 to 265V AC  
(47 to 440Hz)  
20ms or less  
50VA or less  
24V DC  
100/240V AC  
85 to 265V AC  
(47 to 440Hz)  
20ms or less  
45VA or less  
24V ± 10% DC  
24V ± 10% DC  
Permissible Momentary Power Failure  
Demand  
10ms or less  
25W or less  
10ms or less  
25W or less  
Rushed Electric Current  
30A  
6ms  
20A : 100V AC  
30A : 200V AC  
30A  
6ms  
20A : 100V AC  
30A : 200V AC  
With-stand voltage  
AC external terminals to FG: 1500V AC per min.  
DC external terminals to FG: 500V AC per min.  
500V DC, 10MΩ or more  
Insulation Resistance  
Ambient Temperature  
Storage Ambient Temperature  
Ambient Humidity  
Dust  
°
°
°
°
+
+
0 C to 50 C (UG420 STN Color : 0 C to 40 C )  
°
°
-
+
10 C to 60 C  
85% RH or less (without dew condensation)  
No conductive dust  
No cutting oil or no organic solvent to cling to the unit  
No corrosive gas  
Solvent Resistance  
Corrosive Gas  
Vibration frequency: 10 to 150Hz, Acceleration: 9.8m/s2,  
Single amplitude: 0.075mm, 3 directions of X, Y and Z: one hour  
Pulse shape: Sine half wave,  
Vibration Resistance  
Shock Resistance  
Peak acceleration: 147m/s2, 3 directions of X, Y and Z: six times  
Noise voltage: 1500Vp-p, noise width: 1µs  
Contact: 6kV , Air: 8kV  
Noise Resistance  
Static Electricity Discharge Resistance  
Grounding  
Grounding resistance: less than 100Ω  
Protection structure: front panel complies with IP65 (when gasket using)  
rear panel complies with IP20  
Structure  
Form: in a body  
Mounting procedure: inserted in a mounting panel  
Cooling naturally  
Cooling System  
Weight  
Approx. 2.5kg  
Approx. 3.0kg  
310 240 92.3  
334 270 95.8  
Dimensions W  
H
D (mm)  
0.5  
0.5  
0
0.5  
-0  
289+-0 216.2-+0  
313+ 246.2+  
0.5  
-
Panel Cut-out (mm)  
Case Color  
DARK GREY  
PC/ABS  
Material  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Specifications  
1 - 23  
Display Specifications  
Type  
Item  
UG320H  
UG220H-S UG221H-L  
UG221H-S UG221H-T  
UG220H-L  
STN  
Monochrome  
LCD  
STN  
Color  
LCD  
STN  
Monochrome  
LCD  
Display Device  
STN  
Color  
LCD  
TFT  
Color  
LCD  
STN  
Color  
LCD  
Resolution W H (dots)  
Dot Pitch W H (mm)  
Effective Display Area  
320 240  
0.36 0.36  
640 480  
0.082 0.246  
157.4 118.1  
(7.7 inches)  
0.36 0.36  
0.12 0.36  
0.12 0.36  
0.36 0.36  
115.2 86.4  
(5.7 inches)  
W
H (mm)  
Monochrome  
8 gradation  
+ blinking  
128 colors  
+ blinking  
16 colors  
16 colors  
+ blinking  
Monochrome  
8 gradation  
+ blinking  
16 colors  
+ blinking  
Color  
Cold cathode rectifier (which can be exchanged by a user except for UG221)  
Back-light  
By function switches (only in case of STN type)  
Contrast Adjustment  
Back-light Average Life  
Power Lamp  
Approx.  
40,000h  
Approx. 50,000h  
Approx. 40,000h  
*
The lamp is lit when the power is supplied.  
Type  
UG420H-S  
STN  
UG420H-T  
UG520H-V  
TFT  
UG420H-V  
Item  
Display Device  
TFT  
Color LCD  
Color LCD  
Color LCD  
Resolution W H (dots)  
Dot Pitch W H (mm)  
Effective Display Area  
640 480  
0.33 0.33  
800 600  
0.264 0.264  
0.3075 0.3075  
246.0 184.5  
(12.1 inches)  
0.11 0.33  
211.2 158.4  
(10.4 inches)  
W
H (mm)  
Color  
128 colors + blinking 16 colors  
Back-light  
Cold cathode rectifier (which can be exchanged by a user)  
Contrast Adjustment  
Back-light Average Life  
Power Lamp  
By function switches (only in case of STN type)  
Approx.  
25,000h  
Approx. 50,000h  
*
The lamp is lit when the power is supplied.  
When the normal temperature is 25, and the surface luminance of the display is 50% of the default.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Specifications  
1 - 24  
Display Function Specifications (All the UGx20 series)  
Item  
Display Language  
Characters  
Specifications  
Japanese  
ANK code  
Eng./W. Europe Chinese Chinese (simplified)  
Korean  
ASCII code  
ASCII code  
ASCII code  
ASCII code  
ASCII code  
ASCII code  
1/4-size, 1-byte  
JIS 1st and 2nd  
JIS 1st  
Chinese Chinese (simplified) Hangul (without Kanji)  
2-byte (16-dot)  
2-byte (32-dot)  
Size of Characters  
1/4-size : 8 8 dots  
1-byte : 8 16 dots  
2-byte : 16 16 dots or 32 32 dots  
Enlarge : W, 1 to 8 H, 1 to 8  
Number of Characters  
Resolution  
1/4-size  
1-byte  
320 240  
640 480  
800 600  
40 columns 30 lines 80 columns 60 lines 100 columns 75 lines  
40 columns 15 lines 80 columns 30 lines 100 columns 37 lines  
20 columns 15 lines 40 columns 30 lines 50 columns 37 lines  
2-byte  
Display property : normal, reverse, blinking, bold, shadow  
Color : 128 colors + blinking 16 colors / 16 colors + blinking  
/ Monochrome 8 gradation + blinking  
Property of Characters  
Kind of Drawing  
Lines : line, continuous lines, box, parallelogram, polygon  
Circles : circle, arc, sector, ellipse, elliptical arc, elliptical sector  
Others : tile patterns  
Type of lines : 6 types (fine, thick, dot, chain, broken, two-dot chain)  
Tile patterns : 16 types (incl. user-definable 8 types)  
Display property : normal, reverse, blinking  
Property of Drawing  
Display color : 128 colors + blinking 16 colors / 16 colors + blinking  
/ Monochrome 8 gradation + blinking  
Color specification : foreground, background, boundaries (line)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Specifications  
1 - 25  
Function Perform ance Specifications (All the UGx20 series)  
Specifications  
Item  
Max. 1024  
FP-ROM (flash memory), Appox. 2,816Kbytes* (different from the language  
768 per screen (192 per screen for UG221/220 : However, the number of  
memory settings is limited.)  
Screens  
1
)
Screen Memory  
Switches  
3
*
Set, reset, momentary, alternate, to light  
possible to press a function switch and a display switch at the same time  
(With UG221, 2 switches on the display can be pressed at the same time.)  
Actions of Switch  
Lamps  
Reverse, blinking, exchange of graphics  
768 per screen (192 per screen for UG221/220 : However, the number of  
memory settings is limited.)  
3
*
Graphs  
Pie, bar, panel meter and closed area graph can be displayed without limit.  
Total capacity per screen: within 128KB  
Statics and trend graphs: Max. 256 per layer  
(However, the number of memory settings is limited.)  
2
*
3
*
3
*
3
*
Numerical Data Display  
No limits, total capacity per screen: within 128 KB  
(However, the number of memory settings is limited.)  
Character Display  
Message Display  
No limits, total capacity per screen: within 128 KB  
(However, the number of memory settings is limited.)  
Resolution : 320 240, Max. 40 characters  
640 480, Max. 80 characters  
800 600, Max. 100 characters  
No limits, total capacity per screen: within 128 KB  
(However, the number of memory settings is limited.)  
3
*
6144 lines  
Messages  
Sampling display of buffer data  
Sampling  
(constant sample, bit synchronize, bit sample, relay sample, alarm function)  
Max. 1024  
Max. 1024  
Max. 2560  
Max. 1024  
Max. 1024  
Max. 1024  
Max. 1024  
Multi-Overlaps  
Data Blocks  
Graphic Libraries  
Patterns  
Macro Blocks  
Page Blocks  
Direct Blocks  
Max. 1024  
Screen Blocks  
Temp. CTRL / PLC 2 Way  
Calendar  
4
*
Max. 32  
provided  
provided  
Hard-Copy  
provided, 2 types (intermittent short and long sounds)  
ON at all time, specified freely  
Buzzer  
Back-light Auto OFF Function  
Self-diagnostic Function  
Self-test function of switches  
Check function of communication parameter setting  
Check function of communication  
1
Screen memory capacity of the main unit with the following or newer hardware version  
(Approx. 760k bytes for older versions or UG221/UG220)  
*
For hardware version, check the value of the 3rd digit from the left in "Ser. No." line on the rear of the main unit:  
UG520H-V  
6; UG520H-S  
5; UG420H-V  
8; UG420H-T  
9; UG420H-S  
7; UG320H  
4
2
3
4
Layer : 4 per screen (base + 3 overlaps)  
*
*
*
For the memory setting limit, refer to the User's Manual <Function> (FEH376).  
The main unit with the following or newer hardware version is adapted to the temperature controller network:  
UG520H-V 4; UG520H-S 3; UG420H-V 5; UG420H-T 5; UG420H-S 4; UG320H  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Specifications  
1 - 26  
Touch Panel Specifications (All the UGx20 series)  
Item  
Specifications  
Analog, 1024(W) 1024(H)  
Switch Resolution  
Matrix type, UG221: 20(W) 12(H) pcs  
Resistance film form  
Form  
Life of Touch Panel  
Use of one million times or more  
Function Switch Specifications (All the UGx20 series)  
Item  
Number of Switches  
Type of Switch  
Specifications  
8 (6 for UG221/UG220)  
Pressure sensitive switches  
Use of one million times or more  
Life of Switch  
Interface Specifications (All the UGx20 series)  
Item  
Specifications  
Serial Interface  
RS-232C, RS-422/485  
Asynchronous type  
Data length: 7, 8 bits  
Parity: even, odd, none  
Stop bit: 1, 2 bits  
for connecting PLC  
(D-sub 25 pins, female)  
Baud rate: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115000bps  
(115200bps is invalid for UG221/UG220.)  
RS-232C, RS-422/485 (2-wire connection)  
UG00P-MR, Bar code, UG00P-U2, Multi-link 2,  
Temperature control network, UG-Link  
Serial Interface 1 and 2 for  
transferring data  
/other external  
(modular jack, 8 pins)  
Printer Interface  
Complies with centronics, half pitch 36 pins (for PC98x1)  
NEC  
EPSON : compatibles with ESC/P24-84 or later  
HP : PCL Level 3  
CBM292/293 printer (The screen copy cannot be printed out.)  
: PR201  
Drawing Environm ent (All the UGx20 series)  
Item  
Specifications  
Drawing Method  
Drawing Tool  
Exclusive drawing software  
Name of exclusive drawing software : UG00S-CW  
Personal computer : Pentium2 450 MHz or above recommended  
OS : Microsoft Windows 98 / Me / NT version 4.0 / 2000 / XP  
Capacity of hard disk required : free area of approx. 460MB or more  
(for minimum installation : approx. 105Mbyte)  
Display : resolution of 640 480 or more  
(800 600 is recommended)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Serial Connector (CN1)  
1 - 27  
Se ria l Co nne c to r (CN1)  
9
CN1 is used for communicating between a PLC and a POD(RS-232C, RS-422/485).  
Serial Con n ect or (CN1 )  
The pin arrangement of serial connector is as follows:  
Pin No.  
1
Signal  
FG  
Contents  
Frame ground  
2
SD  
RS-232C send data  
L
100-  
240VAC  
N
3
RD  
RS-232C receive data  
NC  
4
RS  
RS-232C RS request to send  
RS-232C CS clear to send  
Not used  
5
CS  
(
)
CN1 Dsub 25pin  
CN1  
6
MJ2  
MJ1  
1
14  
CN2  
7
SG  
Signal ground  
Not used  
8
9
+5V  
0V  
Use prohibited  
Use prohibited  
Not used  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
13  
25  
+
SD  
+
)
RS-422 send data (  
RS-422 send data (  
-SD  
-)  
+
RS  
+
)
RS-422 RS send data (  
Not used  
Not used  
-
RS  
CS  
RS-422 RS send data (-)  
-
RS-422 CS receive data (  
RS-422 CS receive data (  
Not used  
-)  
+
CS  
+
)
21  
22  
Not used  
Not used  
23  
Not used  
+
+
)
RD  
RS-422 receive data (  
24  
25  
-RD  
RS-422 receive data (-)  
Com m u n icat ion Cable of RS-2 3 2 C/ RS-4 2 2  
RS-2 3 2 C  
In case of RS-232C, SD and SG, and RD and SG form a pair.  
Connect the shielded cable to pin No. 1 or the connector case cover.  
(
)
POD CN1  
To the RS-232C port  
of the PLC link unit  
Shielded cable  
Signal  
FG  
Pin No.  
Receive data  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
SG  
RD  
Send data  
RS  
CS  
SG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Serial Connector (CN1)  
1 - 28  
RS-4 2 2  
In case of RS-422, +SD and -SD, and +RD and -RD form a pair.  
Use SG if possible.  
Connect the shielded cable to pin No. 1 or the connector case cover.  
Use UG00P-TC which is the optional equipment made by Fuji Electric. Co., Ltd. in case of using terminal  
blocks in RS-422/485 connection.  
Specify terminal resistance by the dip switches on POD. (Refer to the next page.)  
(
)
POD CN1  
To the RS-422 port  
of the PLC link unit  
Shielded cable  
Signal  
FG  
Pin No.  
1
+
RD  
24  
25  
12  
13  
7
Send data (-)  
-
RD  
Send data (+)  
Receive data (  
+
-
)
SD  
Receive data (+)  
SG  
-
SD  
SG  
Term in al Block s of RS-4 2 2 / 4 8 5  
Connect UG00P-TC (Terminal Converter) which  
is the optional equipment made by Fuji Electric.  
Co., Ltd. to POD via the serial connector on  
POD (CN1) in case of using terminal blocks in  
RS-422/485 connection.  
L
100-  
240VAC  
N
NC  
CN1  
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN2  
C
N
1
The RS-422 signal wiring of UG00P-TC is  
connected to the serial connector (CN1).  
S
B
W
1
T
1
UG00P-TC  
CN1  
Signal  
FG  
Pin No.  
(set to top:  
4-wire connection)  
SW1  
UG00P-TC (Terminal Converter)  
1
TB1  
RD-  
SD-  
RD+  
SD+  
SG  
7
+
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
-
SD  
RD  
SG  
FG  
+
-
RD  
Specify 4-wire connection or 2-wire connection by the dip switch on UG00P-TC (SW1).  
(set to top: 4-wire connection)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Setting of Dip Switches  
1 - 29  
Se tting o f Dip Switc he s  
10  
Set t in g of Dip Swit ch es (DIPSW)  
ON  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Terminal resistance of MJ2(modular jack 2)  
But, it depends on a hardware version.  
RD terminal resistance of pin No. 24 and 25  
Terminal resistance of MJ1(modular jack 1)  
Memory Extension 2  
(invalid for UG220)  
Not used  
Keep DIPSW 2, 3, 4 and 5 (not used) OFF.  
Setting of Memory Extension 2 (This dip switch is invalid for UG220. Keep DIPSW 1 OFF.)  
• Set DIPSW 1 ON in case of selecting “Memory Extension 2.”  
(Refer to Chapter 3 “4.Connecting the Memory Extension unit.” )  
Setting of Terminal Resistance depends on the hardware version of the unit.  
UG520 , UG420 -> O, UG320 -> D, UG221 -> A,  
For hardware version , check the value of the 3rd digit from the left in “Ser. No.” line on the rear of the  
main unit.  
1. In case that the hardware version is the lower-case letter.  
Set DIPSW 7 ON in case of connecting with CN1 by connection of RS-422/485.  
•
Set DIPSW 6 (DIPSW8) ON in case of connecting with Modular Jack 1/2 by the connection as below.  
•
Multi-link2 communication (master)  
Temperature controller communication by connection of RS-485  
Card Recorder : UG00P-MR (option) is used  
Serial Extension I/O : UG00P-U2 (option) is used  
Terminal POD connected with UG-Link by connection of RS-485  
2. In case that the hardware version is the capital letter.  
Set DIPSW 7 ON in case of connecting with CN1 by the connection of RS-422/485.  
•
Set DIPSW 6 ON in case of connecting with Modular Jack 1 by connection as below.  
•
Multi-link2 communication (master)  
Temperature controller communication by connection of RS-485  
Card Recorder : UG00P-MR (option) is used  
Serial Extension I/O : UG00P-U2 (option) is used  
Terminal POD connected with UG-Link by connection of RS-485  
The terminal resistance of MJ 2 is always ON.  
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 Modular Jack 1 & 2  
1 - 30  
Mo d ula r Ja c k 1 & 2  
11  
MJ1/2  
Pin No.  
Signal  
Contents  
RS-485 + data  
RS-485 - data  
Output power supply  
Max. 150mA  
Modu lar J ack 1 & 2 (MJ 1 / 2 )  
The right diagram is the pin arrangement and the  
signal name of modular jack 1 & 2.  
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SD/RD  
-
SD/RD  
12345678  
+
+
5V  
5V  
0V  
0V  
Signal ground  
RD  
SD  
RS-232C receive data  
RS-232C send data  
Set t in g of Modu lar J ack 1 & 2 (MJ 1 / MJ 2 )  
Specify the use of MJ1/MJ2 by the software (UG00S-CW).  
Select [Modular...] from [System Setting]. The [Modular Jack] dialog is displayed. The setting items of  
[Modular Jack 1] and [Modular Jack 2] as follows.  
Modular Jack 1  
[Editor port]  
Modular Jack 2  
[Not used]  
[Memory Card]  
[Barcode]  
[Memory Card]  
[Barcode]  
[UG00P-U2]  
[Multi-Link] 1  
[Temp. CTRL Net] 2  
[UG00P-U2]  
[Multi-Link] 1  
[Temp. CTRL Net] 2  
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
[UG-Link] 2  
[UG-Link] 2  
*
*
[Touch Switch]  
[Ladder Tool]  
[Serial Printer]  
[Touch Switch]  
[Ladder Tool]  
[Serial Printer]  
It is impossible to select both [Multi-Link] and [Temp. CTRL Net] in each setting of modular jack.  
1 It is possible to select this item when [Multi-Link 2] is selected for [Connection] and [Local Port] is set  
*
to [1] in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog.  
2 [Multi Link 2 (master)] and [Temperature Control Network] and [UG-Link] are available in the following  
hardware version or later of POD. As for UG220/UG221, any version can be used.  
*
UG520H-V  
4, UG520H-S  
3, UG420H-V  
5, UG420H-T  
5, UG420H-S  
4, UG320H  
7
Edit or Tran sferrin g  
Use modular jack 1 (MJ1) in case of editor transferring.  
When [Editor port] is selected for [Modular Jack 1] in the [P2] menu, it is also possible to transfer the  
data while running, because the auto change of the local mode and the run mode is valid.  
When [Editor port] is selected, on-line editing and the simulation mode are also available.  
When the item other than [Editor port] is selected for [Modular Jack 1] in the [P2] menu, be sure to  
transfer the data by the software in the local mode. On-line editing and the simulation mode are not  
available.  
When the data is transferred by software, use the cable for data transferring which is the optional  
equipment made by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (UG00C-T: 3m) to connect POD to a personal computer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 Bar Code Reader Interface  
1 - 31  
Ba r Co d e Re a d e r Inte rfa c e  
12  
It is possible to receive the signal from a bar code reader by connecting a bar code reader to POD via the  
modular jack (MJ1/MJ2) of POD series.  
To connect a bar code reader to POD via MJ1/MJ2, use the cable which is the optional equipment made  
by Fuji Electric. Co., Ltd. (UG00C-B).  
Length  
: 3m  
Accessory : Modular Plug  
Brown : +5V  
Red : 0V  
Orange : RXD  
Yellow : TXD  
Notes on Connection  
In case of using the bar code reader which uses the CTS and RTS control, the bar code reader may not  
work normally without jumping RTS and CTS.  
•
•
The output power supply (+5V) is max. 150mA. (Refer to the preview page.)  
When the bar code reader connected to UG400 is used, connect it to UGx20 by the following cable.  
(
)
Barcode Reader  
D-sub 9pin  
Signal  
RTS  
TXD  
RXD  
CTS  
SG  
Pin No. Signal  
*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CTS  
RXD  
TXD  
RTS  
Orange : RXD  
Yellow : TXD  
Jump pins, 1(CTS) and 4(RTS).  
*
+5V  
SG  
Red : 0V  
Brown : +5V  
+5V  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 Printer Interface (CN2)  
1 - 32  
Printe r Inte rfa c e (CN2)  
13  
When a printer is connected to POD via the connector (CN2), it is possible to hard-copy the screen  
display of POD, the data sheet, or the sampling data.  
To connect a printer to POD, use the parallel interface cable of 36 pins which is optional equipment made  
by Fuji Electric. Co., Ltd. (UG00C-C).  
When using CBM292/293 printer, our printer cable be (UG00C-A) is available.  
L
100-  
240VAC  
N
NC  
1
N
C
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN2  
to Printer  
Centronics  
Half pitch 36 pins  
1
B
T
)
+
(
C
D
V
24  
)
-
(
to Printer  
2
N
C
UG220  
Compatible Printer Control Code System and Printer Models  
NEC  
PC-PR201 series  
Compatibles with ESC/P24-84 or later  
EPSON  
HP(HEWLETT PACKARD) PCL Level 3  
CBM292/293  
Line thermal panel printer made by CBM Corporation.  
(The screen copy cannot be printed out.)  
Note of Usage of SRAM Memory Card (UG00K-Sx) or SRAM Cassette (UG00P-SR•UG221P-SR);  
In case of connecting a printer to UGx20 series with a “UG00K-xx(Memory Card:SRAM)” or “UG00P-  
SR•UG221P-SR (SRAM cassette)” at all times, be sure to turn off a printer at the same time when turning  
off UGx20. If a printer is not turned off when UGx20 is turned off, the voltage will circulate from the power  
supply line of a printer to make the power consumption of SRAM cassette’s backup battery increase, and  
finally, the backup battery will consume drastically within a few months.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 Video Interface  
1 - 33  
Vid e o Inte rfa c e  
14  
(Opt ion : UG5 2 0 / UG4 2 0 on ly)  
When a video or a CCD camera is connected to the optional UGx20 which has a video interface, the  
image which is taken by a video or a camera is displayed directly in a screen of UGx20 series (only in  
case of UG520H-V and UG420H-T/V).  
Video Interface of UGx20: BNC  
L
100-  
240VAC  
N
NC  
BNC  
1
N
C
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN2  
Video Display Specifications  
Display Color  
Input Channel  
Signal Form  
Video Input  
: 262,144 colors  
: 4 Channels  
: NTSC type, PAL type  
: 1.0Vp-p 75 ohm unbalance  
Display Size  
: 640 480, 640 240, 320 240, 160 120 dots (possible to change the size)  
Color Adjustment : contrast (256 steps), brightness (256 steps), color gain (256 steps)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 Analog RGB Input  
1 - 34  
Ana lo g RGB Inp ut  
15  
(Opt ion : UG4 2 0 H-T on ly)  
When connector CN3 of UG420H-TC (analog RGB input adapted product) is connected to a personal  
computer, the screen image of the personal computer can be displayed on the UG420H-TC.  
Con n ect or pin layou t  
[h igh den sit y D-su b 1 5 -pin con n ect or (fem ale  
)]  
Input signal  
1
Video signal (red wire)  
5
1
2
3
Video signal (green wire)  
10  
6
Video signal (blue wire)  
4
NC  
15  
11  
5
Ground  
6
Ground  
7
Ground  
8
Ground  
9
NC  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Ground  
NC  
NC  
Horizontal synchronizing signal  
Vertical synchronizing signal  
NC  
In pu t sign al specificat ion  
Displayed number  
of dots  
640 480 dots  
640 400 dots  
720 350 dots  
Color  
max. 262,144 colors  
31.5KHz  
max. 262,144 colors max. 262,144 colors  
Horizontal synchronizing  
frequency  
24.9KHz  
31.5KHz  
Vertical synchronizing  
frequency  
60Hz p-p  
0.7V  
p-p  
p-p  
56Hz  
70Hz  
Input amplitude  
0.8V  
0.7V  
PC9801  
DOS screen,  
BIOS screens  
DOS/V  
BIOS screen  
Windows screen  
Sample main signals  
No signal other than the above can be displayed.  
To display Windows screen, after displaying the [Control panel] dialog with the [Control panel]  
command in the [Setting] menu under [Start Menu], double-click the [Screen] icon in this dialog, and  
set refresh rate to 60 Hz in the [Screen property] window.  
If a cable too long is used to connect between connector CN3 of UG420H-TC and the personal computer, the  
screen image may be blurred due to noise. To prevent noise, it is recommended to mount a ferrite core.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 Analog RGB Input  
1 - 35  
Tou ch -swit ch em u lat ion fu n ct ion  
With this function, you can manipulate the Windows screen displayed on the POD with touch  
switches, i.e. without using the mouse.  
Applicable version of screen development editor  
This function is adapted to 2.4.0.0 or newer versions of the screen development editor.  
Applicable version of POD system program  
This function is adapted to 1.200 or newer versions of POD system program (SYSTEM PROG.VER.)  
Touch panel driver to be installed  
PN-WIN98/95 Ver. 2.00J (Japanese version) from GUNZE.  
Operating environment of the access vision driver  
Computer: DOS/V personal computer  
OS:  
Windows98/95  
Restrictions  
1. DOS application software that runs on MS-DOS prompt cannot be operated with touch panel.  
2. This function is compatible with PS/2 mouse but may not with the unique pointing device of  
manufacturer’s own development that is installed mainly in note type personal computer.  
About setting  
1. Select [Touch Switch] from [Modular Jack 1] or [Modular Jack 2] in the [Modular] dialog box of  
[System Setting]. (When you want to display the symbols for DOS/V personal computer on the POD,  
send the coordinate output of the touch panel to the DOS/V personal computer via the MJ port that is  
set in this step.)  
2. The touch panel driver supplied from GUNZE needs to be installed in the DOS/V personal computer  
in advance. For how to install the driver, refer to the manual supplied with the GUNZE touch panel  
driver.  
Example of setting  
The procedure for adding the “touch-switch emulation” function under the environment where the analog  
RGB input function is used is described below.  
In this example, it is supposed that the following setting is already made:  
On the [RGB Adjust] screen, [Setting 1] is set to “BIOS screen” while [Setting 2], to “Windows  
screen”. (For details regarding the adjustment, see “Screen Adjustment” explained above.)  
Connect between COM2 of the personal computer and MJ1 of the POD by means of UG00C-T (for  
screen data transfer).  
1. Change over to POD input screen (Windows screen is displayed).  
2. Activate the screen development editor and open the file that is currently transferred to the POD.  
3. Select [Touch Switch] from [Modular Jack 2] in the [Modular] dialog box of [System Setting].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 Analog RGB Input  
1 - 36  
4. Save the file, and send it to the POD.  
5. Mode is changed to RUN. In this mode, change screen over to the [RGB Input] screen.  
(Windows screen is displayed.)  
DOS/V Personal  
computer  
POD  
6. In order to execute “touch-panel emulation”,  
Editor Port  
UG00C-T  
MJ1  
MJ2  
COM1  
COM2  
connect between COM1 (communication port) of  
the personal computer and MJ2 (touch switch)  
of the POD by means of UG00C-T.  
Touch Switch  
7. Insert the “Touch Panel Driver PN-WIN98/95” floppy disk supplied from GUNZE in the floppy disk drive  
and, from the files stored in the floppy disk, double-click “/Serial/setup.exe”. Then follow the directions  
displayed on the screen to install the touch panel driver.  
Then [Welcome!]  
[Select destination to install]  
[Install]  
[Hardware setting] (See item 2 of the  
notes described later.)  
[Installation end] [Install] Clicking the [OK] button here automatically  
restart the personal computer. At the same time, the POD comes in RUN mode. Then change screen  
over to the [RGB Input] screen to start Windows.  
8. When Windows is started, the calibration software is automatically activated. Set items for calibration  
(see item 3 of the notes described later).  
This completes the installation of the touch panel driver.  
9. When it is necessary to reset the “Touch Panel Driver PN-WIN98/95”, select menus as follows:  
[Start]  
[Programs]  
[Gunze]  
[PN-WIN98_95 Serial]  
[Touch panel driver]. Changes in the  
setting will take effect when the personal computer is started the next time.  
Notes  
*
1. It is impossible to change over to the [Main Menu] screen from the Windows screen displayed on the  
POD.  
2. The [Hardware setting] dialog box is prepared for installing the touch panel driver. For [COM Port] in  
this dialog box, select the COM port of the personal computer that is to be connected to the MJ port (for  
touch switch) of the POD. For [Address] and [IRQ], set the address and IRQ of the selected COM port.  
When you do not know which COM port of the personal computer to connect to the MJ port (for touch  
switch) of the POD, or when you do not know the address or IRQ of the COM port, refer to the  
instruction manual for the personal computer.  
[Baud rate: 9600], [Parity: none], [Data bits: 8] and [Stop bits: 1] are fixed.  
3. With the calibration software, correct the touch position and the mouse cursor indication position.  
Touch as accurately as possible the red crosses that are displayed on the screen in the order of first  
point (lower left on the screen), second point (upper right on the screen), third point (lower right on the  
screen), and fourth point (upper left on the screen). Touch operation won’t be available if the calibra-  
tion setting is not correctly completed. In such case, re-execute the setting.  
4. Not that once the touch panel driver is installed, the serial port assigned for it won’t be able to be used  
for other application till unless is uninstalled.  
5. When your personal computer has only one COM (communication) port it is recommended to use other  
personal computer for transferring POD screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 Connection  
1 - 37  
Co nne c tio n  
16  
1 : 1 Lin k Com m u n icat ion  
PLC  
One POD and one PLC are connected.  
POD  
run  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
s
t
o
p
RS-232C or RS-422(RS-485)  
1 : n Lin k Com m u n icat ion (Mu lt i-drop)  
One POD and multiple PLCs are connected. (n = 1 to 32)  
POD  
RS-485  
Maximum length 500m  
(from POD to the last PLC)  
run  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
run  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
run  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
run  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
stop  
stop  
stop  
stop  
PLC1  
PLC2  
PLC3  
PLCn  
Available PLC for multi-link communication  
Manufacturer  
Models  
MICREX-F series, FLEX-PC series, FLEX-PC COM  
FUJI  
MITSUBISHI  
OMRON  
SHARP  
HITACHI  
AnA/N/U series, QnA series, QnH(Q)series, A Link+Net10,FX series (A prt)  
SYSMAC C, CV, CQM1, CS1 DNA  
JW series, JW100/70H COM Port, JW20/30 COM Port  
HIDIC-H  
MATSUSHITA MEWNET  
YOKOGAWA  
YASKAWA  
TOYOPUC  
Koyo  
FA500, FA-M3, FA-M3R  
Memobus, CP9200SH/MP900  
TOYOPUC  
SU/SG, SR-T  
Allen-Bradley  
GE Fanuc  
TOSHIBA  
SIEMENS  
SHINKO  
SAMSUNG  
KEYENCE  
LG  
PLC-5, SLC500, Micro Logix 1000  
90 series  
T series  
S7-200 PPI  
SELMART  
SPC series, N_plus, SECNET  
KZ series, KV series  
MASTER-K500 / K1000, MASTER-K xxxS CNET  
FACON FB series  
MICRO3  
FATEK  
IDEC  
MODICON  
TAIAN  
Modbus RTU  
TP02  
Universal Serial  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 Connection  
1 - 38  
Multi-drop Communication (RS-485)  
Refer to the PLC manual of each manufacturer for connection.  
<E.g.>  
The following example describes how one POD is connected to three PLCs made by MITSUBISHI.  
See MITSUBISHI’s manual for further details.  
POD (CN1)  
Link unit  
Signal  
FG  
Link unit  
Signal  
FG  
Link unit  
Signal  
Signal Pin No.  
FG  
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
SG  
FG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
SG  
1
12  
13  
24  
25  
7
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
SG  
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
SG  
SD/RD terminal resistance  
(ON)  
Use twist shielded cable.  
*
n : 1 Lin k Com m u n icat ion (Mu lt i-lin k 2 )  
Up to 4 units can be connected to one PLC.  
Between a PLC and the POD master station is the same as those for 1:1 connection.  
*
PLC  
Communication between the stations : RS-485 (2-wire system), maximum length = 500 m  
(a)  
(b)  
(c)  
(d)  
(e)  
Terminal  
block  
CN1  
MJ2  
CN1  
POD Slave  
(local Port No. 2)  
CN1  
POD Slave  
(local Port No. 3)  
CN1  
POD Slave  
(local Port No. 4)  
POD Master  
(local Port No. 1)  
Available PLCs for multi-link2.  
As of October 2002, the PLCs supported are as follows. All the PLCs which are usable for 1:1 communi-  
cation will be supported.  
For the I/F driver, the Multi-Link 2 is supported by the version of 1.100 or later (screen development  
software: version of 2.1.4.0 or later) and as for a POD master station, make sure the hardware version of  
the unit is as follows.  
As for UG221/UG220, any version can be used.  
UG520H-V  
4, UG520H-S  
3, UG420H-V  
5, UG420H-T  
5, UG420H-S  
4, UG320H  
7
The Multi-Link 2 cannot be used with a communication interface unit such as UG03I-T, J, E, C, S, P,  
*
UG02I-T, J, S.  
The Multi-Link 2 cannot be used with Temperature controll network.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 Connection  
1 - 39  
<Type>  
A.B : Micro Logix 1000  
GE Fanuc : 90 series  
GE Fanuc : 90 series(SNP-X)  
TOSHIBA : T series  
SIEMENS : S5  
SIEMENS : S7  
SIEMENS : S5 UG400  
SIEMENS : TI500/505  
SIEMENS : TI500/505(UG400)  
SIEMENS : S5 PG port  
SIEMENS : S7-300MPI(HMI ADP)  
SIEMENS : S7-300MPI(PC ADP)  
SAMSUNG : SPC series  
SAMSUNG : N_plus  
<Calendar>  
<Type>  
<Calendar>  
Depends on the model  
Provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Provided  
FUJI : MICREX-F series  
FUJI : MICREX-SX series  
FUJI : MICREX-SX CPU  
FUJI : FLEX-PC series  
FUJI : FLEX-PC CPU  
Provided  
Depends on the model  
Depends on the model  
Provided  
Depends on the model  
Depends on the model  
Provided  
Provided  
Provided  
Depends on the model  
Provided  
FUJI : FLEX-PC COM(T)  
FUJI : FLEX-PC(T)  
FUJI : FLEX-PC CPU(T)  
MITSUBISHI : AnA/N/U series  
MITSUBISHI : QnA series  
MITSUBISHI : ACPU Port  
MITSUBISHI : FX series  
MITSUBISHI : QnACPU Port  
MITSUBISHI : QnHCPU Port (A)  
MITSUBISHI : QnHCPU Port (Q)  
MITSUBISHI : FX series Link(A prt)  
MITSUBISHI : FX2N series  
MITSUBISHI : FX1S series  
OMRON : SYSMAC C  
OMRON : SYSMAC CV  
OMRON : SYSMAC CS1  
SHARP : JW series  
Provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Provided  
Provided  
Provided  
Provided  
SAMSUNG : SECNET  
KEYENCE : KZ series  
Depends on the model  
Not provided  
Provided  
KEYENCE : KZ-A500 CPU Port  
KEYENCE : KZ/KV series CPU  
KEYENCE : KZ24/300 series CPU  
KEYENCE : KV10/24 series CPU  
KEYENCE : KV700 series CPU  
LG : MASTER-K10/60/200  
LG : MASTER-K500/1000  
LG : LGMKX00S  
LG : MASTER-KxxxS CNET  
LG : GLOFACNET  
FANUC : Power Mate  
FATEK AUTOMATION: FACON FB series Provided  
IDEC : MICRO3  
Depends on the model  
Provided  
Depends on the model  
Provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Provided  
Provided  
Provided  
Provided  
SHARP : JW100/70H COM Port  
SHARP : JW20 COM Port  
HITACHI : HIDIC-H  
Provided  
HITACHI : HIDIC-S10/2 alpha  
HITACHI : HIDIC-S10/ABS  
MATSUSHITA : MEWNET  
YOKOGAWA : FA500  
YOKOGAWA : FA-M3  
YOKOGAWA : FA-M3R  
YASKAWA : Memobus  
YASKAWA : CP9200SH/MP900  
TOYOPUC  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Depends on the model  
Provided  
Provided  
Provided  
Depends on the model  
Not provided  
Provided  
Provided  
Depends on the model  
Provided  
MODICON : Modbus RTU  
YAMATAKE : MX series  
TAIAN : TP02  
SAIA : PCD  
MOELLER : PS4  
Provided  
Provided  
Not provided  
Telemecanique : TSX Micro  
Automationdirect : Direct LOGIC  
Automationdirect  
: Direct LOGIC(K-Sequence) Depends on the model  
TOYO : uGPC sx series  
TOYO : uGPC sx CPU  
Not provided  
Depends on the model  
KOYO : SU/SG  
KOYO : SR-T  
KOYO : SR-T(K prt)  
KOYO : SU/SG(K-Sequence)  
A.B : PLC-5  
Depends on the model  
Provided  
Not provided  
Depends on the model  
Not provided  
Provided  
Provided  
Provided  
A.B : SLC500  
Up to 4 units can be connected to one PLC.  
Use the terminal converter (UG00P-TC) , the optional equipment made by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.  
For details, please see the “User’s Manual <Multi-link 2 > (FEH364)”.  
Wire the shielded FG only at the one of both sides so that they are not connected.  
*
•
Set the dip switch (SW1) of UG00P-TC as 2-wire connection when the UG00P-TC terminal converter is used.  
(b)  
(c)  
(d)  
(e)  
POD Master  
MJ1/2  
POD Slave  
CN1+UG00P-TC  
POD Slave  
CN1+UG00P-TC  
POD Slave  
CN1+UG00P-TC  
Terminal block  
prepared by user  
Signal  
FG  
Signal  
FG  
Signal  
Signal  
FG  
+
+
RD  
+
+
+
RD  
RD  
-
-
RD  
-
-
RD  
-
RD  
+
SD  
+
SD  
+
SD  
-SD  
-SD  
-SD  
SG  
SG  
SG  
SG  
SG  
terminal resistance  
terminal resistance  
terminal resistance  
terminal resistance  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
Short-circuit between +RD and +SD , -RD and -SD when the UG00P-TC terminal converter is not used.  
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 Connection  
1 - 40  
n : 1 Lin k Com m u n icat ion (Mu lt i-lin k )  
Multiple POD and a PLC are connected. (n=1 to 32)  
POD  
1
POD  
2
POD  
3
POD  
n
The connections shown  
*
below are not recommended.  
RS-485  
Maximum length 500m  
(from PLC to the last POD)  
run  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
stop  
run  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
s
t
o
p
PLC  
Available PLCs for multi-link  
Manufacturer  
Models  
FUJI  
MICREX-F series  
MITSUBISHI  
MITSUBISHI  
OMRON  
SHARP  
AnA/N/U series, A link+Net10, FX series Link(A prt)  
QnA CPU port (with UG00P-DI)  
SYSMAC C series, CV series  
JW series, JW100/70H COM Port, JW20/30 COM Port  
HIDIC-H  
HITACHI  
MATSUSHITA MEWNET  
YOKOGAWA  
YASKAWA  
TOYOPUC  
TOSHIBA  
SIEMENS  
SHINKO  
FA500, FA-M3, FA-M3R  
Memobus, CP9200SH/MP900  
TOYOPUC  
T series  
S7-200 PPI  
SELMART  
SAMSUNG  
LG  
SPC series, SECNET  
MASTER-K500 / K1000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 Connection  
1 - 41  
When multiple POD are connected to a link unit of PLC, use the terminal converter (UG00P-TC), the  
optional equipment made by Fuji Electric. Co., Ltd. for RS-485 connection.  
Set the dip switch (SW1) of UG00P-TC as 2-wire connection when the UG00P-TC terminal converter is used.  
•
POD + UG00P-TC  
POD + UG00P-TC  
POD + UG00P-TC  
Link unit  
Signal  
FG  
Signal  
FG  
Signal  
FG  
Signal  
FG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
SG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
SG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
SG  
+RxD  
-RxD  
+TxD  
-TxD  
SG  
RD terminal resistance  
(ON)  
RD/SD terminal resistance  
(ON)  
RD/SD terminal resistance  
(ON)  
Use twist shielded cable.  
*
Short-circuit between +RD and +SD, and -RD and -SD when the UG00P-TC terminal converter is not used.  
•
When multiple POD are connected directly to MITSUBISHI’s QnA CPU port, the optional equipment,  
UG00P-DI is required. Also, the use of the optional cable, MB-CPUQT which is to connect UG00P-TC on  
POD side to UG00P-DI on QnA CPU port side, is recommended.  
Set the dip switch (SW1) of UG00P-TC as 2-wire connection when the UG00P-TC terminal converter is used.  
•
UG00P-DI  
POD + UG00P-TC  
POD + UG00P-TC  
POD + UG00P-TC  
UG port  
Pin No. Signal  
Signal  
FG  
Signal  
FG  
Signal  
FG  
1
+SD  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
SG  
2
3
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
SG  
+RxD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
+TxD  
+DSR  
+DTR  
SG  
4
5
7
SG  
15  
16  
17  
18  
20  
21  
-RxD  
-TxD  
-DSR  
-DTR  
RD terminal resistance  
(ON)  
RD/SD terminal resistance  
(ON)  
RD/SD terminal resistance  
(ON)  
Use twist shielded cable.  
*
Short-circuit between +RD and +SD, and -RD and -SD when the UG00P-TC terminal converter is not used.  
•
An n-to-1 system can be also configured using optional interface units (UG03I (02I)-S, -T, -J, -E(2), -C, or -P).  
For the details, refer to the User’s Manual of each optional interface unit.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 42  
Op e ra tio n o f POD Ma in Me nu  
17  
When the power of POD is turned on for the first time, the screen on the below left is displayed. After  
transferring the screen data to POD, the following “Main Menu” is displayed.  
When power is turned on for the first time:  
"Main Menu" after trasferring data  
Main Menu  
UG420H-TC1M1  
1998- 9- 1 07 : 23 : 30  
System Information  
FONT  
VER.1.000/1.000/1.000  
JAPANESE 32  
I/F DRV VER. 1.000  
MELSEC AnA/N/U  
SYSTEM PROG. VER.1.000  
Screen Data  
PLC Type: MITSUBISHIAnA/N/U series  
Comment:  
Information  
Error: Stop  
Time-Out: 0.50 sec  
Size  
:
786432  
Retry:  
3
Connection:  
Signal Level: RS232C  
PLC Stat.No.:  
1
:
1
Baud Rate: 19200  
Data Length:  
Stop Bit:  
7
1
0
Parity: Even  
Send Delay: 0msec  
Editor : MJ1  
Memory-Card  
I/O Test  
If the screen data has been already transferred to POD, press the [SYSTEM] switch, then press the [F1]  
switch. The [Main Menu] is displayed.  
The "Main Menu" is displayed.  
the [SYSTEM] switch  
the [F1] switch  
S
Y
S
T
S
Y
S
T
Main Menu  
UG420H-TC1M1  
1998- 9- 1 07 : 23 : 30  
E
M
E
M
System Information  
FONT  
VER.1.000/1.000/1.000  
JAPANESE 32  
I/F DRV VER. 1.000  
MELSEC AnA/N/U  
M
O
D
E
M
O
D
E
SYSTEM PROG. VER.1.000  
Screen Data  
PLC Type: MITSUBISHIAnA/N/U series  
Comment:  
Error: Stop  
Time-Out: 0.50 sec  
Information  
Size  
:
786432  
Retry:  
3
Connection:  
Signal Level: RS232C  
PLC Stat.No.:  
1
:
1
Baud Rate: 19200  
Data Length:  
Stop Bit:  
7
1
0
Parity: Even  
Send Delay: 0msec  
Editor : MJ1  
Memory-Card  
I/O Test  
The switches that are displayed on the [Main Menu] screen changes  
with the option provided from the manufacturer, the communication  
I/F unit installed, or the screen setting (temperature controller, etc.)  
*
Main Men u  
The “Main Menu” is the system menu for transferring the data between a personal computer and POD.  
When the screen data is transferred from a personal computer to POD, the “Main Menu” must be displayed.  
(If [Editor port] is selected for [Modular Jack 1] in the [P2] menu of the editing software or the on-line editing is  
executed, it is not necessary to display the “Main Menu”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 43  
System program version  
Model name of POD  
Font data version  
Data size  
Main Menu  
System Information  
UG420H-TC1M1  
1998- 9- 1 7 : 23 : 30  
FONT  
VER.1.000/1.000/1.000  
JAPANESE 32  
I/F DRV VER. 1.000  
MELSEC AnA/N/U  
SYSTEM PROG. VER.1.000  
PLC I/F driver  
version and name  
Screen Data  
PLC Type: MITSUBISHIAnA/N/U series  
Comment:  
Error: Stop  
Time-Out: 0.50 sec  
Retry: 3  
Information  
Size : 786432  
PLC type and comment  
specified by the panel editor  
Connection: 1 : 1  
Signal Level: RS232C  
PLC Stat.No.: 0  
Baud Rate: 19200  
Data Length: 7  
Stop Bit: 1  
Parity: Even  
Send Delay: 0msec  
Multi-Link Network  
Multi-Link Network  
Own Stat.No.: 1  
V6 Total: 2  
Retry: 10  
Setting of  
comm. parameter  
Multi-link setting  
This menu is displayed  
*
Editor : MJ1  
only in case of selecting [1:1]  
Memory-Card  
I/O Test  
in [Connection] of [Comm. Parameter].  
Setting of modular jack  
b
a
"Main Menu" of UG221/UG220  
Model name of  
UG221/UG220  
a
System program version  
UG220H-SC4  
Main Menu  
S Y S P R O G . V E R . 0 . 5 9 1  
1998-  
7
-23  
12:24:30  
I / O T e s t  
b
c
Font data version  
Memory  
-Card  
F O N T V E R . 1 . 0 0 0 / 1 . 0 1 0 / 1 . 0 0 0  
J A P A N E S E 3 2  
I / F D R V V E R . 1 . 0 0 0  
M E L S E C A n A / N / U  
Communication  
Parameter  
PLC I/F driver  
version and name  
P L C T y p e  
:
M I T S U B I S H I A n A / N / U s e r i e s  
C o m m e n t :  
PLC type and  
comment specified  
by the panel editor  
Editor:MJ1  
Setting of modular jack  
In case of UG221 and UG220, when the “Communication Parameter” switch on the “Main Menu” is  
pressed, the following “Comm. Param.” is displayed.  
*
12:24:30  
Main Menu  
I / O T e s t  
Comm. Param.  
Memory  
Screen Data Size : 786432  
-Card  
Multi-Link Network  
Error : Stop  
Time-out : 0.50 sec  
Retry : 3  
Communication  
Own Stat.No.  
V6 Total  
Retry  
:
:
:
1
2
10  
Parameter  
C o n n e c t i o n  
S i g n a l L e v e l  
:
M u l t i - L i n k  
R S 2 3 2 C  
N
:
P L C S t a t . N o . : 0 0  
Press the "Communication  
Parameter" switch.  
B a u d R a t e  
D a t a L e n g t h  
S t o p B i t  
P a r i t y  
S e n d D e l a y  
:
:
:
:
:
1 9 2 0 0  
7
1
E v e n  
2 0 m s e c  
Multi-link setting  
Editor:MJ1  
This menu is displayed  
only in case of selecting  
[1 : 1] in [Connection] of  
[Comm. Parameter].  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 44  
I/ O Test  
When the switch “a” on the “Main Menu” is pressed, the following “I/O Test” is displayed.  
This is the test menu to check only POD hardware.  
Memory-Card  
I/O Test  
B
E
C
Press the [I/O Test] switch.  
D
I/O Test  
Main Menu  
SYS  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
Printer Check  
Switch Check  
A
Self-Loop Test  
Please refer to the manual, "Hardware Specifications".  
Communication Port  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
CN1  
MJ1  
MJ2  
RS-232C  
RS-485  
Self-Loop Test  
F-7  
In case of UG221 and UG220, when the switch “A” on the “Main Menu” is pressed, the following “I/O  
Test” is displayed.  
*
Then, the “Serial Test” switch on the “I/O Test” is pressed. The following “Serial Test” is displayed.  
The self-loop test can be executed on this screen.  
12:24:30  
I / O T e s t  
Memo
Press the "I/O Test" switch.  
-Card  
Communiction  
Paramete
E
D
A
Press the "Serial Test" switch.  
Main Menu  
I/O Test  
Serial Test  
I/O Test  
SYS  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
Self-Loop Test  
P l e a s e r e f e r t o t h e m a n u a l ,  
" H a r d w a r e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s " .  
Communication Port  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
CN1  
MJ1  
MJ2  
RS232C  
RS485  
Printer Check  
Switch Check  
Self-Loop  
Test  
Serial Test  
C
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 45  
A. Self-loop Test  
This is the test menu to check the signals necessary for UG20 to communicate with PLC or a personal  
computer by using only POD.  
Signal Test of RS-232C in CN1  
Select [CN1] and [RS-232C] in [Communication Port] by pressing each switch.  
Communication Port  
CN1  
MJ1  
MJ2  
RS-232C  
RS-485  
Loop-back Test  
•
Check the signals, [SD] and [RD].  
1
Jump pins, 2 and 3 of CN1.  
2
The test is OK, if the [OK] lamp turns on when the [Self-Loop Test] switch is pressed.  
If t h e [NG] lam p t u rn s on wh en t h e sam e swit ch as above is pressed, ask t h e  
advice of you r dist ribu t or.  
*
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
Self-Loop Test  
Self-Loop Test  
Test of CTS/RTS  
•
Check the signals, [CTS] and [RTS].  
1
Jump pins, 4(RTS) and 5(CTS) of CN1.  
2
The test is OK if the [CTS] lamp and the [RTS] lamp turn on at the same time that the [RTS] switch is  
pressed. Similarly, the test is OK if the [CTS] turns off at the same time that the [RTS] is turned off.  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
Self-Loop Test  
Self-Loop Test  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
Self-Loop Test  
Self-Loop Test  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 46  
Signal Test of RS-485 in CN1  
Select [CN1] and [RS-485] in [Communication Port] by pressing each switch.  
Communication Port  
CN1  
MJ1  
MJ2  
RS-232C  
RS-485  
Loop-back Test  
•
Check the signals, [SD] and [RD].  
1
Jump each pin, 12 and 24, 13 and 25 of CN1.  
2
The test is OK, if the [OK] lamp turns on when the [Self-Loop Test] switch is pressed.  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
Self-Loop Test  
Self-Loop Test  
If t h e [NG] lam p t u rn s on wh en t h e sam e swit ch as above is pressed, ask t h e  
*
advice of you r dist ribu t or.  
Test of CTS/RTS  
•
Check the signals, [CTS] and [RTS].  
1
Jump each pin, 14(+RTS) and 19(+CTS), 17(-RTS) and 18(-CTS) of CN1.  
2
The test is OK if the [CTS] lamp and the [RTS] lamp turn on at the same time that the [RTS] switch  
is pressed. Similarly, the test is OK if the [CTS] turns off at the same time that the [RTS] is turned off.  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
Self-Loop Test  
Self-Loop Test  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
Self-Loop Test  
Self-Loop Test  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 47  
Signal Test of RS-232C in MJ1 and MJ2  
Select [MJ1] (or [MJ2]) and [RS-232C] in [Communication Port] by pressing each switch.  
Communication Port  
CN1  
MJ1  
MJ2  
RS-232C  
RS-485  
Loop-back Test  
•
Check the signals, [SD] and [RD].  
Execute the test by connecting the data transfer cable (UG00C-T) to CN1.  
1. Set the adaptor, ADP25-9, which is attached to UG00C-T, to UG00C-T. And connect the modular  
jack side of UG00C-T to MJ1 (or MJ2), ADP25-9 side of UG00C-T to CN1.  
UG00C-T  
CN1  
MJ1/2  
2. The test is OK, if the [OK] lamp turns on when the [Self-Loop Test] switch is pressed.  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
CTS  
NG  
RTS  
OK  
Self-Loop Test  
Self-Loop Test  
If t h e [NG] lam p t u rn s on wh en t h e sam e swit ch as above is pressed, ask t h e  
advice of you r dist ribu t or.  
*
Signal Test of RS-485 in MJ1 and MJ2  
When you execute the signal test of RS-485 in MJ1 and MJ2, ask the advice of your distributor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 48  
B. Prin t er Ch eck  
Check the signal of printer.  
The test is OK if the test printout is executed satisfactorily when connecting POD to a printer and pressing  
this [Printer Check] switch.  
!"#$%&@ 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  
!"#$%&@ 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  
!"#$%&@ 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  
!"#$%&@ 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  
!"#$%&@ 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  
!"#$%&@ 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  
!"#$%&@ 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  
C. Swit ch Ch eck  
Check the reaction of the touch switches on the POD panel.  
When the [Switch Check] switch is pressed, the following screen is displayed.  
The switch check screen is displayed.  
Main Menu  
SYS  
F-1  
X:  
Y:  
Check  
Switch Check  
F-2  
Retu  
Eras  
Press the [Switch Check] switch.  
Confirm that the color of the pressed area changes into white.  
The white color means that the switch reacts to the touch normally.  
Pressing the [F4] switch leads to the previous [I/O Test] screen.  
Pressing the [F5] switch deletes all the white dots.  
X:  
Y:  
Retu  
Eras  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 49  
In case of matrix type  
*
When pressing the [Switch Check] switch, the following screen which is divided by a minimum size of  
switch is displayed. Confirm that the color of the pressed switch changes into white. Pressing the  
corner right below leads to the previous [I/O Test] screen.  
the [Switch Check] screen  
Main Menu  
SYS  
F-1  
Switch Check  
F-2  
If the pressed area is reversed, these  
Press  
switches reacts to the touch normally.  
the [Switch Check] switch.  
D. Test of SYSTEM & Fu n ct ion Swit ch es  
Check the eight switches (six switches for UG221 and UG220) placed vertically on the right side of the  
POD panel.  
The test is OK if the lamps on the screen turn on when each switch is pressed.  
SYS  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
SYS  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
The test is OK  
when the [F-4] lamp is lit.  
Press the [F4] switch.  
F-7  
F-7  
E. Main Men u  
Pressing this [Main Menu] switch leads to the previous [Main Menu].  
The "Main Menu" is displayed.  
Main Menu  
UG420H-TC1M1  
1998- 9- 1 7 : 23 : 30  
Main Menu  
SYS  
F-1  
System Information  
FONT  
VER.1.000/1.000/1.000  
JAPANESE 32  
I/F DRV VER. 1.000  
MELSEC AnA/N/U  
SYSTEM PROG. VER.1.000  
Check  
Switc
F-2  
Screen Data  
PLC Type: MITSUBISHIAnA/N/U series  
Comment:  
Error: Stop  
Time-Out: 0.50 sec  
Information  
Size 786432  
:
Retry:  
3
Connection:  
Signal Level: RS232C  
PLC Stat.No.:  
1
:
1
Baud Rate: 19200  
Multi-Link Network  
Multi-Link Network  
Data Length:  
Stop Bit:  
7
1
Own Stat.No.:  
V6 Total:  
1
2
Press the [Main Menu] switch.  
0
Parity: Even  
Send Delay: 0msec  
Retry: 10  
Editor : MJ1  
Memory-Card  
I/O Test  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 50  
Mem ory-Card  
When the [Memory-Card] switch on the “Main Menu” is pressed, the following “Memory-Card” is displayed.  
This screen is to transfer the screen data between POD and a memory-card.  
Memory-Card  
I/O Test  
The "Memory-Card" screen is displayed.  
Press the [Memory-Card] switch.  
Memory-Card  
Main Menu  
Port Selection  
Modular Jack  
MJ1  
Memory-Card  
Socket  
Transfer  
"Memory-Card" of UG220/UG221  
Display <--- Card  
Display ---> Card  
Display <--> Card  
Start  
Main Menu  
Memory-Card  
Data Selection  
Port Selection  
Modular Jack  
MJ1  
Transfer  
Display <-- Card  
Screen Data  
I/F Driver  
Font Data  
Display --> Card  
Display <-> Card  
Data Selection  
Screen Data  
Cancel  
UG Program  
I/F Driver  
Font Data  
Start  
Cancel  
UG Program  
Procedure of Data Transferring  
1)Port Selection  
Select the [Modular Jack MJ1] switch (or [Modular Jack MJ2]) in case of using a modular jack.  
Select the [Memory-Card Socket] switch in case of using a memory-card interface. When each switch is  
pressed, the “Memory-Card Information” window is displayed.  
In case of UG221 and UG220, pressing the “Close” switch leads to the original screen after checking the  
memory card information.  
Memory-Card  
Memory-Card  
Main Menu  
Close  
Memory-Card Information  
Port Selection  
V6 Program  
Version:-.---  
:
Modular Jack  
M1  
Memory-Card  
Socket  
Font Data  
:
Transfer  
Version:-.---/-.---/-.---  
I/F Driver  
:
Display <--- Card  
Display ---> Card  
Display <--> Card  
Start  
Version:-.---  
Screen PLC Type:  
Screen Comment:  
Data Selection  
Screen Data  
I/F Driver  
Font Data  
Cancel  
UG Program  
In case of select in g [Mem ory Card] from [Modu lar J ack 2 ] in t h e [Ot h ers] dialog of  
UG0 0 S-CW, it is possible to select the [Modular J ack 2] switch in the [Port Selection]  
m en u of t h e [Mem ory-Card] screen on POD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 51  
2)Data Selection, Transfer  
Pressing each switch leads to selection of the target for data transferring.  
(Possible to select multiple items.)  
Data Selection  
Transfer  
Memory-Card  
Memory-Card  
Main Menu  
Main Menu  
Close  
Close  
Memory-Card Information  
Memory-Card Information  
Sys Program  
Version:-.---  
:
Sys Program  
Version:-.---  
:
Font Data  
:
Transfer  
Font Data  
:
Transfer  
Version:-.---/-.---/-.---  
Version:-.---/-.---/-.---  
I/F Driver  
:
Display <--- Card  
Display ---> Card  
Display <--
Start  
I/F Driver  
:
Display <--- Card  
Display ---> Card  
Display <--> Card  
Start  
Version:-.---  
Version:-.---  
Screen PLC Type:  
Screen Comment:  
Screen PLC Type:  
Screen Comment:  
Data Selection  
Data Selection  
Screen Data  
I/F Driver  
Font Data  
Screen Data  
I/F Dr
Font Data  
Cancel  
Cancel  
UG Program  
UG Program  
3)Start  
When the [Start] switch is pressed, the data transferring starts. During data transfer, the character,  
“Start”, on the switch changes into the character,”Busy”, and the switch starts blinking.  
After transferring data, the following message is displayed. Press the [OK] switch.  
During transferring  
Start transferring  
Memory-Card  
Memory-Card  
Main Menu  
Main Menu  
Close  
Close  
Memory-Card Information  
Memory-Card Information  
:
Sys Program  
Version:-.---  
:
Sys Program  
Version:-.---  
Font Data  
:
Transfer  
Font Data  
I/F Driver  
:
Transfer  
Version:-.---/-.---/-.---  
Version:-.---/-.---/-.---  
I/F Driver  
:
Display <--- Card  
Display ---> Card  
Display <--> Card  
Busy  
:
Display <--- Card  
Display ---> Card  
Display <--> Card  
Start  
Version:-.---  
Screen PLC Type:  
Screen Comment:  
Version:-.---  
Screen PLC Type:  
Screen Comment:  
Data Selection  
Data Selection  
Screen Data  
I/F Driver  
Font Data  
Screen Data  
I/F Driver  
Font Data  
Cancel  
Canc
UG Program  
UG Program  
Finish transferring  
Memory-Card  
Main Menu  
Close  
Memory-Card Information  
Sys Program  
Version:-.---  
:
Font Data  
:
Transfer  
Version:-.---/-.---/-.---  
I/F Driver  
:
Display <--- Card  
Display ---> Card  
Display <--> Card  
Start  
Version:-.---  
Screen PLC Type:  
Screen Comment:  
Data Selection  
Screen Data  
Font Data  
Cancel  
I/F Driver  
V6 Program  
Wh en t ran sfer t h e dat a from POD t o m em orycard via t h e card in t erface(=  
[Mem ory-Card Sock et ]) of POD, u se SRAM t ype m em ory card. FLASH ROM  
t ype m em ory card is n ot u sed.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 52  
Message Display in Data Transferring  
Work nomally finished.  
If an error occurs during transferring data, the message  
display window shown on the right is displayed. The kinds  
and the contents of the messages are as shown below.  
O K  
Message  
Contents  
Work normally finished.  
The specified operation has been concluded normally.  
UG00P-MR not connecting  
UG00P-MR Communication Error  
UG00P-MR is not connecting when selecting a modular jack.  
A communication error occurred between POD and  
UG00P-MR when selecting a modular jack.  
Memory-Card not setting  
A memory card is not inserted.  
(Or in case of trying to write data into a memory card  
when inserting FLASH ROM type memory card)  
Memory-Card Capacity over  
Cannot write the data into a memory card because  
the data size in POD is larger than the capacity of  
a memory card.  
Write Protect : ON  
Cannot write data into a memory card because  
the write protect switch in a memory card is ON.  
Writing Error occurred.  
The error occurred while writing data into a memory  
card.  
Selected data does not exist.  
POD type is different.  
The data in the reading target does not exist.  
The specified type of the data in POD is different from the  
type of the memory card data.  
Selected data can not be read.  
Reading Error occurred.  
The data in a memory card cannot be read.  
The error occurred during writing data into a FLASH  
ROM of POD.  
Data discrepant  
There is some discrepancy in data, when comparing data  
between a memory card and POD.  
Screen data on POD will be broken.  
This message appears to inform the user that the data in  
POD will be broken by transferring the font data (the size  
which is larger than the present data) from a memory  
card to POD. (The [OK] switch continues the transferring.  
The [Cancel] switch stops transferring.)  
Undefined Error occurred.  
The error occurred due to some cause other than  
the above mentioned.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 53  
Screen Adju st m en t [Opt ion : UG4 2 0 H-T(RGB in pu t adapt ed produ ct ) on ly]  
Depending on what type of personal computer is used, RGB output frequency for Windows screen, BIOS  
screen or DOS screen changes. Therefore, adjustment is necessary.  
When there is only one type of output frequency, select either “Setting 1” or “Setting 2”.  
How to adjust  
1. Display the local MAIN MENU screen.  
UG420H-TC12  
1998-5 -5 07:23:30  
Main Menu  
System Information  
FONT  
I/F DRV VER.1.100  
MELSEC AnA/N/U  
VER.1.000/01.020/1.000  
JAPANESE 32  
SYSTEM PROG. VER. 1.150  
Screen Data  
Error : Stop  
Time-Out : 0.50 sec  
Retry : 3  
PLC Type: MITSUBISHIAnA/N/U series  
Comment : DEMO Screen  
Information  
Size : 786432  
Connection : 1 : 1  
Signal Level : RS-232C  
PLC Stat.No. : 0  
Baud Rate : 19200  
Data Length : 7  
Stop Bit  
Parity  
: 1  
: Even  
Send Delay  
:
0msec  
RGB Adjust  
I/O Test  
Memory-  
Card  
Editor:MJ1  
2. With the [RGB Adjust] switch, display the [RGB Adjust] screen.  
UG420H-TC12  
1998-5 -5 07:23:30  
Main Menu  
System Information  
FONT  
I/F DRV VER.1.100  
MELSEC AnA/N/U  
VER.1.000/01.020/1.000  
JAPANESE 32  
SYSTEM PROG. VER. 1.150  
Screen Data  
Error: Stop  
Time-Out: 0.50 sec  
Retry: 3  
PLC Type: MITSUBISHIAnA/N/U series  
Comment : DEMO Screen  
Information  
Size : 786432  
Connection: 1 : 1  
Signal Level: RS-232C  
Baud Rate:  
Data Length:  
19200  
7
PLC Stat.No.:  
0
Stop Bit:  
Parity:  
1
Even  
Send Delay: 0msec  
RGB Adjust  
Memory-  
Card  
I/O Test  
Editor:MJ1  
[RGB adjustment] screen  
RGB Adjust  
Main Menu  
Please refer to the manual, "Hardware".  
Horizontal : 31180 Hz Vertical : 59 Hz  
Setting-1  
Not used  
Setting-2  
Not used  
Adjust  
Adjust  
Clear  
Save  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 54  
3. First, BIOS screen is adjusted.  
Press the [Adjust] switch in the [Setting 1] box to activate RGB display mode.  
RGB Adjust  
Main Menu  
Please refer to the manual, "Hardware".  
Horizontal : 31180 Hz Vertical : 59 Hz  
Setting-1  
Not used  
Setting-2  
Not used  
Adjut  
Adjust  
Clear  
Save  
With the BIOS screen displayed, adjust with switches [F 1] to [F 6].  
•
•
[SYSTEM]  
End of adjustment  
[F 1]  
Vertical: Screen is moved downward.  
Vertical: Screen is moved upward.  
Horizontal: Screen is move rightward.  
Horizontal: Screen is moved leftward.  
Increments dots by +1.  
•
[F 2]  
•
[F 3]  
•
[F 4]  
•
[F 5]  
•
[F 6]  
Decrements dots by -1.  
•
Adjustment of dots is made so that blurring is minimized.  
*
BIOS Screen  
ROM PCI/ISA BIOS  
(
2A69KA1E  
)
COMS SETUP UTILITY  
AWARD SOFTWARE, INC.  
! ! CPU SOFT MENU II ! !  
STANDARD CMOS SETUP  
BIOS FETUREES SETUP  
CHIPSET FEATURES SETUP  
POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP  
PNP, PCI & ONBOAD I/O  
LOAD SETUP DEFAULTS  
LOAD BIOS DEFAULTS  
PASSWORD SETTING  
IDE HARD DISK DETECTION  
SAVE & EXIT SETUP  
EXIT WITHOUT SAVING  
Esc  
F10  
:
:
Ouit  
Save  
:
:
Select Item  
Change Color  
&
Exit Setup  
(
,
Shift  
)
F2  
CPU Name  
,
Type  
Speed  
.
.
.
When adjustment is completed, press the [SYSTEM] switch to return to the [RGB Adjust] screen.  
ROM PCI/ISA BIOS  
(
2A69KA1E  
)
COMS SETUP UTILITY  
AWARD SOFTWARE, INC.  
! ! CPU SOFT MENU II ! !  
STANDARD CMOS SETUP  
BIOS FETUREES SETUP  
CHIPSET FEATURES SETUP  
POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP  
PNP, PCI & ONBOAD I/O  
LOAD SETUP DEFAULTS  
LOAD BIOS DEFAULTS  
PASSWORD SETTING  
IDE HARD DISK DETECTION  
SAVE & EXIT SETUP  
EXIT WITHOUT SAVING  
Esc  
F10  
:
:
Ouit  
Save  
:
:
Select Item  
Change Color  
&
Exit Setup  
(
,
Shift  
)
F2  
CPU Name  
,
Type  
Speed  
.
.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 55  
4. Then the Windows screen is adjusted.  
Press the [Adjust] switch in the [Setting 2] box to activate RGB display mode.  
RGB Adjust  
Main Menu  
Please refer to the manual, "Hardware".  
Horizontal : 31180 Hz Vertical : 59 Hz  
Setting-1  
Not used  
Setting-2  
Not used  
Adjust  
Adjust  
Clear  
Save  
With the Windows screen displayed, adjust with switches [F 1] to [F 6].  
•
•
When adjustment is completed, press the [SYSTEM] switch to return to the [RGB Adjust] screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 56  
5. Press the [Save] switch to save the setting data. (The setting data is written in the flash ROM.)  
RGB Adjust  
Main Menu  
Please refer to the manual, "Hardware".  
Horizontal : 31180 Hz Vertical : 59 Hz  
Setting-1  
Not used  
Setting-2  
Not used  
Adjust  
Adjust  
Clear  
Save  
6. By doing this, screen adjustment is completed.  
Not es on RGB in pu t  
When there is no RGB input (when the cable is not connected), the mode cannot be changed over to  
RGB display mode.  
When bit 12 of read area (n+1) is set to “1”, the mode is changed over to RGB display mode the  
moment RGB input is restored (the moment the cable is connected).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 57  
Set t in g for SRAM casset t e  
When the optional SRAM cassette (UG00P-SR, UG221P-SR) is installed in the POD main unit, it is  
possible to adjust the internal calendar of the SRAM cassette or to format the SRAM cassette.  
Adjusting the internal calendar of SRAM cassette (Main Menu)  
1)Activate the [Main Menu] screen.  
Press the [Cassette Adjust] switch.  
This switch is displayed when the SRAM  
cassette is installed for FONT VER. 1.100/  
1.090/1.000 or newer.  
1998-5 -5 07:23:30  
Main Menu UG420H-TC12  
System Information  
SYSTEM PROG. VER. 1.150  
FONT  
I/F DRV VER.1.100  
MELSEC AnA/N/U  
VER.1.100/1.090/1.000  
JAPANESE 32  
Screen Data  
Error : Stop  
Time-Out : 0.50 sec  
Retry : 3  
PLC Type: MITSUBISHIAnA/N/U series  
Comment :  
Information  
Size : 2883584  
Connection : 1 : 1  
Signal Level : RS-232C  
PLC Stat.No. : 0  
Baud Rate : 19200  
Data Length : 7  
Stop Bit  
Parity  
: 1  
: Even  
Send Delay  
:
0msec  
Cassette Adjust  
Memory-  
Card  
Editor:MJ1  
I/O Test  
2)The [Cassette Adjust] screen is displayed.  
2000-6-26　14:38:51  
Cassette Adjustment  
Main Menu  
Date and Time Adjustment  
Date:  
Time:  
←
→
＋
－
S e t  
Format of SRAM Cassette  
* Formats SRAM cassette in the present screen data type.  
Format  
Execute  
+
3)Select the data to be changed with [ ] or [ ] switch, and change the data with [ ] or [  
-] switch.  
4)After adjusting date and time, press the [SET] switch.  
5)To return to the [Main Menu] screen, press the [Main Menu] switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 Function Switches  
1 - 58  
Formatting the SRAM cassette  
When you changed the setting of SRAM cassette area, be sure to format the SRAM cassette.  
SRAM cassette can be formatted from the [Main Menu] screen.  
If the format of the SRAM cassette does not coincide with the setting of screen data, the SRAM cassette  
cannot be used (error No. 163 occurs.)  
How to format the SRAM cassette  
•
1)Activate the [Main Menu] screen.  
Press the [Cassette Adjust] switch. This  
switch is available for FONT VER. 1.100/  
1.090/1.000 or newer.  
1998-5 -5 07:23:30  
Main Menu UG420H-TC12  
System Information  
SYSTEM PROG. VER. 1.150  
FONT  
I/F DRV VER.1.100  
MELSEC AnA/N/U  
VER.1.100/1.090/1.000  
JAPANESE 32  
Screen Data  
Error : Stop  
Time-Out : 0.50 sec  
Retry : 3  
PLC Type: MITSUBISHIAnA/N/U series  
Comment :  
Information  
Size : 2883584  
Connection : 1 : 1  
Signal Level : RS-232C  
PLC Stat.No. : 0  
Baud Rate : 19200  
Data Length : 7  
Stop Bit  
Parity  
: 1  
: Even  
Send Delay  
:
0msec  
Cassette Adjust  
Memory-  
Card  
Editor:MJ1  
I/O Test  
2)With the [Cassette Adjust] switch, display the [Cassette Adjust] screen.  
3)Press the [Format] switch and then the [Execute] switch.  
Then the cassette is formatted the same as the currently displayed screen data, and you return to the  
[Main Menu] screen.  
2000-6-26　14:38:51  
Cassette Adjustment  
Main Menu  
Date and Time Adjustment  
Date:  
Time:  
←
→
＋
－
S e t  
Format of SRAM Cassette  
* Formats SRAM cassette in the present screen data type.  
Execute  
Format  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 Operation of POD Main Menu  
1 - 59  
Func tio n Switc he s  
18  
Type  
[SYSTEM], [F1], [F2], [F3], [F4], [F5], [F6], [F7]  
(UG221, UG220 : [SYSTEM], [F1] ~ [F5])  
S
Y
S
R
E
M
t h e [SYSTEM] swit ch  
By pressing this switch, the functions of the switches [F1] ~ [F7] are defined.  
The type of the [SYSTEM] switch is alternate. When this switch is pressed once, the  
switch menu is displayed by the side of the function switches [F1] ~ [F5], and each  
function switch corresponds to an item on the displayed switch menu.  
M
O
D
E
When the [SYSTEM] switch is pressed again, the switch menu which is displayed on the  
screen will disappear, and the functions of switches [F1] ~ [F7] are defined for the purpose  
of the user. The data of these function switches is allocated to the memory area of PLC.  
B
A
C
K
L
T
Fu n ct ion of [F1 ] ~ [F5 ] wh en t h e swit ch m en u is displayed  
[F1] : Mode  
This switch changes the operation mode.  
Main Menu Mode  
Run Mode  
RUN Mode  
Main Menu Mode (possible to specify the changing time)  
[F2] : Contrast Adjustment (dark) ------- invalid in case of the TFT color type  
This switch adjusts the contrast of LCD. When the [F2] switch is pressed once, the LCD color becomes  
dark. If this switch is held down for 1 second, the LCD color changes rapidly into darkness.  
[F3] : Contrast Adjustment (intermediate) ------- invalid in case of the TFT color type  
This switch also adjusts the contrast of LCD. When the [F3] switch is pressed once, the LCD color  
becomes intermediate.  
[F4] : Contrast Adjustment (light) ------- invalid in case of the TFT color type  
This switch adjusts the contrast of LCD. When the [F4] switch is pressed once, the LCD color becomes  
light. If this switch is held down for 1 second, the LCD color changes rapidly into lightness.  
[F5] : Backlight  
This switch turns the backlight of POD on or off.  
If you want to use this function, you have to set [Backlight] of the [Others] dialog in [System Setting].  
The following list shows the backlight function specified in the editing software.  
Backlight  
ON  
Function Switch (F5)  
Ignored.  
Auto 1  
Auto 2  
The following actions are added to the regular functions of these items :  
Even if the time does not reach the setting time, the backlight will turn off if the  
[F5] switch is pressed (provided that bit 11(Backlight) of Read Area n+1 is OFF  
level). (Refer to the Users Manual<Function>(FEH376).)  
If you select [Manual], the backlight will turn on or off only when this switch is  
pressed. Also, you can specify the item, [Backlight Power ON Time Control].  
When you turn the power supply of POD on ...  
Manual  
Manual2  
[ON] : the backlight is lit.  
[OFF] : the backlight is off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection to  
Link Units  
1. FUJI PLC • 1  
2. FUJI PLC • 2  
3. FUJI PLC • 3  
40. KEYENCE PLC• 1  
41. KEYENCE PLC• 2  
42. KEYENCE PLC• 3  
43. LG PLC  
4. FUJI PLC • 4  
5. FUJI PLC • 5  
44. FANUC PLC  
6. FUJI PLC • 6  
45. FATEK PLC  
7. MITSUBISHI PLC • 1  
8. MITSUBISHI PLC • 2  
9. MITSUBISHI PLC • 3  
10. MITSUBISHI PLC • 4  
11. MITSUBISHI PLC • 5  
12. MITSUBISHI PLC • 6  
13. OMRON PLC• 1  
14. OMRON PLC• 2  
15. Sha rp PLC • 1  
46. IDEC PLC  
47. MODICON PLC  
48. YAMATAKE PLC  
49. TAIAN PLC  
50. SAIA PLC  
51. MOELLER PLC  
52. Te le m e c a niq ue PLC  
53. Auto m a tio nd ire c t PLC  
54. VIGOR PLC  
16. Sha rp PLC • 2  
55. DELTA PLC  
17. HITACHI PLC • 1  
18. HITACHI PLC • 2  
19. Ma tsushita PLC  
20. YOKOGAWA PLC • 1  
21. YOKOGAWA PLC • 2  
22. YASKAWA PLC• 1  
23. YASKAWA PLC• 2  
24. TOYOPUC PLC  
25. Ko yo PLC  
56. BALDOR PLC  
57. TOYO DENKI PLC  
26. Alle n-Bra d le y PLC • 1  
27. Alle n-Bra d le y PLC • 2  
28. GE Fa nuc PLC • 1  
29. GE Fa nuc PLC • 2  
30. TOSHIBA PLC  
31. TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC  
32. SIEMENS PLC • 1  
33. SIEMENS PLC • 2  
34. SIEMENS PLC • 3  
35. SIEMENS PLC • 4  
36. SIEMENS PLC • 5  
37. SIEMENS PLC • 6  
38. Shinko PLC  
39. SAMSUNG PLC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 FUJI PLC • 1  
2 - 1  
FUJI PLC • 1  
1
(MICREX-F se rie s)  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Link Unit  
NV1L-RS2  
Wiring Diagram  
F55  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
NC1L-RS2  
NC1L-RS4  
F70, F70S  
MICREX-F  
Series  
FFU120B  
FFK120A  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
F80H, F120H, F120S  
F140S, F15xS  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
19200bps  
0
0
Parity  
Even  
Even  
RS-232C  
RS-422  
1 (Asynchronous non-protocol by command)(fixed)  
Transmission  
Control Mode  
3 (Asynchronous non-protocol by command)(fixed)  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
7 (ASCII)  
7
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
Terminal Resistor at Receiver  
Provided for RS-485  
Swit ch Set t in g  
MODE Switch: RS-232C: 1  
RS-485: 3  
RS-485 Port Setting SW: “0” for both x10, x1  
RS-485 Terminal Resistor: ON  
Character Switches  
No  
8
Setting  
Contents  
Switch setting  
Parity provided  
Even  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
7
6
5
7 bit  
4
1 bit  
3
Same as POD  
(normally 19200bps)  
2
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 FUJI PLC • 1  
2 - 2  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
0
Remarks  
M
K
B
L
(auxiliary relay)  
(keep relay)  
WM as word device  
WK as word device  
WB as word device  
WL as word device  
WF as word device (Read only)  
1
(input/output relay)  
(link relay)  
2
9
F
(special relay)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
TS (timer/set value)  
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
TR (timer/current value)  
W9 (timer/current value 0.1)  
CS (counter/set value)  
CR (counter/current value)  
BD (data memory)  
1
1
1
1
1
WS (step control relay)  
Wn (file memory)  
2
3
For the items for which double-word numeric type can be set (e.g. numeric data display,  
graph, etc.), specify “double word” from the editor.  
*1•  
For the items for which double-word cannot be specified (e.g. read/write area, buffering area,  
etc.), only lower 16 bits become the object of processing, and upper 16 bits are ignored.  
Step relay  
*2•  
S area is the memory for controlling steps, in which numbers for the location of steps are  
stored. For sequence instructions and word operation instructions from PLC program, S area  
for 100 words is prepared, supposing the data structure of directly readable/writable unsigned  
2-digit BCD (8-bit).  
•
Step number corresponds to individual value of 2-digit BCD. It does not correspond to bit,  
unlike in B, M, K or other areas. In using step numbers, you can imagine as if 100 pieces of  
SC coil (00 to 99) exist in one word.  
For above explained reasons, with the POD, S area cannot be specified for switch memory or  
lamp memory. To access the S area, use word operation switch. (Specify the step number  
to be turned ON by the operational expression for word operation switch (transfer).)  
[Example]  
•
•
To set such that S00.20 turns ON when the switch on the screen is pressed,  
Operation of switch:  
Set to word operation.  
Operation expression: Set to “transfer”.  
Source:  
Set constant “20 (h) ”.  
Set “WS00”.  
Destination:  
Do not specify SC area for data display or as the control area of various modes, as doing so  
may result in abnormal operation. However, when 2-digit or smaller numeric values are  
displayed in data display mode, operation is performed normally.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 FUJI PLC • 1  
2 - 3  
When you access the file memory from the POD, be sure to define FILE instruction on the  
PLC side. File type must be SI (16-bit length). Communication with file memories that are  
defined by BD, DI, etc. cannot correctly be performed.  
*3•  
To specify a memory from the editor, input [File No.] + [ : ] (colon) + [address] in this order.  
[Example] To specify W30.2  
<E.g.> W30 : 00002  
Address  
Colon  
File No.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
DR  
SG  
CD  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 8 5  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
1
PLC  
SDA  
SDB  
RDA  
RDB  
SG  
SG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
7
12  
13  
24  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 FUJI PLC • 2  
2 - 4  
FUJI PLC • 2  
2
(MICREX-SX se rie s)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Link Unit  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
NP1L-RS1  
SPH Series  
(NP1PS- x )  
MICREX-SX  
Series  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
NP1L-RS2  
NP1L-RS4  
Only one unit of POD can be connected to one link unit, except for “Multi-link 2” connection.  
*
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
38400bps (fixed)  
Baud Rate  
RS-232C  
RS-422  
RS-232C  
RS-422  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Transmission  
Control Mode  
Parity  
Even (fixed)  
8 (fixed)  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
1 (fixed)  
No function block (FB) settings are required on the PLC.  
*
Available Mem ory  
Standard Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
I
(input memory)  
-
O
M
(output memory)  
(standard memory)  
-
2
4
8
RM (retain memory)  
SM (system memory)  
To specify a memory, basically a variable name is set. For the variable name linkage function, refer to the  
User’s Manual <Variable Name Cooperation Function> (FEH363).  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
To set an in direct m em ory u sin g a m acro, specify t h e CPU No. u sin g t h e ext en ded code.  
In direct m em ory set t in g by m acro is n ot available for in pu t (I) or ou t pu t (Q) m em ory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 FUJI PLC • 2  
2 - 5  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
RD  
SD  
ER  
SG  
DR  
RS  
CS  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 8 5  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Female:  
)
POD (CN1)  
(+)  
SDA  
2
1
4
3
9
8
6
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
(-)  
SDB  
(+)  
SDA  
SDB  
RDA  
RDB  
7
12  
(
-)  
+
SD  
SD  
RD  
(+)  
-
13  
(
-)  
+
24  
-
FG  
RD 25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
When signals are easily influenced by noise, attach a ferrite core (TDK ZCAT2032-0930 is  
recommended) to both the ends of the cable.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 FUJI PLC • 3  
2 - 6  
FUJI PLC • 3  
3
(MICREX-SX CPU Po rt)  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Connected Cable  
UG00C-Sx  
MICREX-SX  
CPU  
MICREX-SX Loader Port  
When the CPU is updated, or the specifications are changed, there is some possibility that POD  
cannot be connected to the PLC.  
*
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
Connect to the CPU port. The communication parameter setting of POD is done automatically.  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
38400bps  
38400bps  
Transmission Control Mode  
Parity  
RS-422  
RS-422  
Even  
Even  
8
1
8
1
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
Available Mem ory  
Standard Memory  
(input memory)  
TYPE  
Remarks  
I
-
-
2
4
8
O
M
(output memory)  
(standard memory)  
RM (retain memory)  
SM (system memory)  
To specify a memory, basically a variable name is set. For the variable name linkage function, refer to the  
User’s Manual <Variable Name Cooperation Function> (FEH363).  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
To set an in direct m em ory u sin g a m acro, specify t h e CPU No. u sin g t h e ext en ded code.  
In direct m em ory set t in g by m acro is n ot available for in pu t (I) or ou t pu t (Q) m em ory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 FUJI PLC • 3  
2 - 7  
Not es on t h e direct con n ect ion wit h t h e CPU port of SX series CPU  
Fully consider the influence of noise on the communication cable routed between the POD and MICREX-SX.  
(The level of noise resistance when a ferrite core is attached to the cable: 1,000 V)  
Fully consider the influence of noise on the cable when routing it on the board and in the unit. Route the  
cable apart from the power lines.  
•
•
•
The longer the communication cable, the more it is influenced by noise. Carefully route the cable.  
We have 2-m, 3-m, and 5-m communication cables (UG00C-S) dedicated for connection to PLCs.  
Wirin g  
Use an UG00C-S cable dedicated for communication to the PLC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 FUJI PLC • 4  
2 - 8  
FUJI PLC • 4  
4
(FLEX-PC se rie s)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
NS-RS1  
Select PLC Type  
1
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
*
NS Series, NS-T  
FLEX-PC  
Series  
NJ-RS2  
NJ-RS4  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
NJ Series, NJ-T  
NB Series  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
NB-RS1  
1
When FLEX-PC TOYOTA version is used, select “FLEX-PC(T)” in [PLC Type].  
*
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
19200bps  
0
0
Parity  
Even  
Even  
RS-232C  
RS-422  
1 (Asynchronous non-protocol by command)(fixed)  
Transmission  
Control Mode  
3 (Asynchronous non-protocol by command)(fixed)  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
7 (ASCII)  
7
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
Terminal Resistor at Receiver  
Provided for RS-485  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 FUJI PLC • 4  
2 - 9  
Swit ch Set t in g  
MODE Switch: RS-232C: 1  
RS-485: 3  
RS-485 Port Setting SW: “0” for both 10,  
RS-485 Terminal Resistor: ON  
Character Switches  
1
No  
8
Setting  
ON  
Contents  
Switch setting  
Parity provided  
Even  
7
ON  
6
ON  
5
ON  
7 bit  
4
ON  
1 bit  
3
ON  
Same as POD  
(normally 19200bps)  
2
ON  
1
OFF  
Available Mem ory  
Standard Memory TOYOTA Ver. TYPE  
Remarks  
D
W
M
L
(data register)  
(link register)  
(internal relay)  
(latch relay)  
D
0
R
1
M
K
2
WM as word device  
3
WL(WK) as word device  
WX as word device  
WY as word device  
X
Y
R
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
(file register)  
X
4
Y
5
W
TN  
CN  
T
6
TN (timer/current value)  
CN (counter/current value)  
7
*
*
8
T
(timer/contact)  
9
C
(counter/contact)  
C
10  
11  
WS (step relay)  
-
The current values of the timer and counter are indicated with TN/CN for purposes of  
convenience in the table above. (The actual value is T/C.)  
*
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 FUJI PLC • 4  
2 - 10  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
DR  
SG  
CD  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 8 5  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
PLC  
SDA  
SDB  
RDA  
RDB  
SG  
7
+
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
-
+
RD  
-
RD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 FUJI PLC • 5  
2 - 11  
FUJI PLC • 5  
5
(FLEX-PC CPU p o rt)  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
RS-422 [UG200C-N]  
1
*
FLEX-PC Loader Port  
NJ-B16 RS-232C Port  
FLEX-PC  
CPU  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
1
When FLEX-PC CPU TOYOTA version is used, select “FLEX-PC CPU(T)” in [PLC Type].  
When the CPU is updated, or the specifications are changed, there is some possibility that  
*
POD cannot be connected to the PLC.  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
Connect to the CPU port. The communication parameter setting of POD is done automatically.  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
Item  
Setting of PLC (All fixed)  
19200bps  
Baud Rate  
Loader Port  
Transmission  
Control Mode  
RS-422  
RS-232C  
Aneven  
8
RS-422  
NJ-B16RS-232C Port  
RS-232C  
Parity  
Aneven  
8
1
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1
When you use the RS-232C port of NJ-CPU-B16, be sure to set above items using the [Comm.  
Parameter ] dialog on the PLC side.  
Available Mem ory  
Standard Memory  
TOYOTA Ver. TYPE  
Remarks  
D
W
M
L
(data register)  
D
0
(link register)  
(internal relay)  
(latch relay)  
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
(file register)  
R
1
M
K
2
WM as word device  
WL(WK) as word device  
WX as word device  
WY as word device  
3
X
Y
R
X
4
Y
5
W
TN  
CN  
T
6
TN (timer/current value)  
CN (counter/current value)  
7
*
*
8
T
(timer/contact)  
9
C
(counter/contact)  
C
10  
11  
WS (step relay)  
-
The current values of the timer and counter are indicated with TN/CN for purposes of  
convenience in the table above. (The actual value is T/C.)  
*
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 FUJI PLC • 5  
2 - 12  
Wirin g  
Fully consider the influence of noise on the communication cable routed between the POD and FLEX-PC.  
(The level of noise resistance when a ferrite core is attached to the cable: 1,000 V)  
Fully consider the influence of noise on the cable when routing it on the board and in the unit. Route the  
cable apart from the power lines.  
•
•
•
The longer the communication cable, the more it is influenced by noise. Carefully route the cable.  
When you create the cable, attach a ferrite core to reduce the influence of noise.  
Connected to the loader port  
N Series PC  
Attach a ferrite core.  
Attach it close to the connector.  
For a long distance communication, it is recommended to use link units in consideration of the noise  
influence.  
Dedicat ed Cable  
Dedicated cables for direct connection with the N  
Series loader port is available. The table on the  
right shows the types of dedicated cables available.  
Type  
Details  
UG200C-N02  
UG200C-N03  
UG200C-N05  
For direct connection with loader port : 2 m  
For direct connection with loader port : 3 m  
For direct connection with loader port : 5 m  
Ferrite cores are already attached to all the dedi-  
cated cables.  
Two ferrite core are respectively attached to the POD end and PLC end.  
Maker  
Type  
: TDK  
: ZCAT0930  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 FUJI PLC • 5  
2 - 13  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 1 ( connection of the UG200C-N )  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
1
PLC  
3
+
RD 24  
+
SD  
SG  
12  
7
5
2
-
RD  
25  
13  
8
4
-
SD  
6
8
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
PLC  
)
(NJ-B16)  
D-sub 15pin (Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
RD  
SD  
2
3
4
5
7
CTS  
RTS  
SG  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 FUJI PLC • 6  
2 - 14  
FUJI PLC • 6  
6
(TOYOTA ve rsio n NJ Co m p ute r Link)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Select PLC Type  
FLEX-PC  
COM  
Computer link  
of FLEX-PC NJ-JM  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 1]  
Connect to the terminal block of the NJ-JM computer link.  
For further information, refer to the PLC manual.  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
1
1
0
Even  
7
0
*
*
Parity  
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
7
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
The station No. other than zero (0) is invalid for communication.  
*
PLC Set t in g  
It is necessary to set the computer link parameters in the file register on the PLC.  
For the communication parameters above, set “0026h” into W0000 in the file register to define the OPDF  
command.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 FUJI PLC • 6  
2 - 15  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
R
M
K
(data register)  
(link register)  
(internal relay)  
(latch relay)  
0
1
2
WM as word device  
WK as word device  
WX as word device  
WY as word device  
3
X
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
(file register)  
4
Y
5
W
6
TN (timer/current value)  
CN (counter/current value)  
7
Read only  
*
*
8
Read only  
T
C
Z
V
(timer/contact)  
(counter/contact)  
(special register)  
(special relay)  
9
10  
12  
13  
WV as word device  
The current values of the timer and counter are indicated with TN/CN for purposes of  
convenience in the table above. (The actual value is T/C.)  
*
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
PLC  
+
7
+
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
-
-
SG  
+
RD  
-
RD  
Max. 500 m  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Recommended cable : O-VCTF-SS, 2C 0.75 mm 2, made by Chyugoku Densen  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 MITSUBISHI PLC • 1  
2 - 16  
MITSUBISHI PLC • 1  
7
(A/ Q se rie s link unit)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Select PLC Type  
AJ71C24-S6  
AJ71C24-S8  
AJ71UC24  
A2A, A3A  
AJ71UC24  
A2U, A3U, A4U  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
AJ71C24  
A1, A2, A3  
A1N, A2N, A3N  
A3H, A3M, A73  
AJ71C24-S3  
AJ71C24-S6  
AJ71C24-S8  
AJ71UC24  
A series  
link  
A0J2C214-S1  
A0J2, A0J2H  
A2US  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
A1SJ71UC24-R2  
A1SJ71UC24-R4  
A1SJ71UC24-PRF  
A1SJ71C24-R2  
A1SJ71C24-R4  
A1SJ71C24-PRF  
CPU built-in port  
A1S, A1SJ, A2S  
A2CCPUC24  
QnH(A mode)  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
A1SJ71UC24-R2  
A1SJ71UC24-R4  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
AJ71QC24N  
AJ71QC24  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
QnA series  
link  
Q2A, Q3A, Q4A  
Q2ASx  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
A1SJ71QC24  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
AJ71QC24-R4(CH1)  
AJ71QC24-R4(CH2)  
QnH(Q mode)  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
QJ71C24  
QnH(Q)  
series  
link  
Q00, Q01, Q00J  
RS-232C [UG00C-Q]  
(refer to P2-27)  
Q00, Q01  
Tool Port*1  
*1 When connecting POD to the tool port of Q00 or Q01 CPU, refer to page 2-27.  
About the ladder transfer function, refer to Appendix.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 MITSUBISHI PLC • 1  
2 - 17  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
A series link unit  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
0 for both STATION x10 and x1  
Even  
0
Parity  
Even  
1
*
RS-232C  
RS-422  
MODE1  
Trans. Mode 1  
Transmission  
Control Mode  
MODE5  
Trans. Mode 1  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
7 (ASCII)  
7
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
Sumcheck  
Provided (fixed)  
Available (fixed)  
Provided (fixed)  
Provided (fixed)  
Write while running  
Terminal Resistor at Sender  
Terminal Resistor at Receiver  
*1 Mode 1: without CR/LF, Mode 4: with CR/LF  
If [Trans. Mode 4] is selected from [Trans. Mode] in [Comm. Parameter] of the panel editor,  
specify [MODE4] in case of RS-232C, or select [MODE8] in case of RS-422.  
Q series link unit  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
0 for both STATION X 10 and X1  
Even  
0
Parity  
Even  
RS-232C  
RS-422  
When QnA series link is connected:  
MODE5 (Binary Mode) (fixed).  
When QnH(Q) series link is connected:  
MC Protocol Type 5 (fixed).  
Transmission  
Control Mode  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8 (fixed)  
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
Sumcheck  
Write while running  
Provided (fixed)  
Available (fixed)  
Q00/Q01 CPU  
When connecting the POD to the tool port of Q00 or Q01 CPU, it is neccessary to specify [serial  
communication] setting on PLC parameter. Note on the following setting.  
UG00S-CW  
Select [QnH(Q) series link] in [PLC type].  
GX Developer (Application software for programming MITSUBISHI PLCs)  
1. Double click [PLC parameter].  
2. Click the [Serial] tab menu of the [Qn(H) Parameter] dialog.  
3. Check [Use serial communication] to specify communication parameters such as Baud rate,  
Sum check, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 MITSUBISHI PLC • 1  
2 - 18  
Be sure to check these items.  
Check that these settings are  
the same as POD comm.  
parameters.  
Swit ch Set t in g  
The following is an example to show the settings for both rotary dip switches and dip switches on PLC.  
ON  
<E.g.1> Signal Level: RS-232C, Baud Rate: 19200bps, Trans. Mode: Trans. Mode 1  
SW11  
AJ 7 1 UC2 4  
SW12  
SW13  
STATION No  
10  
STATION No  
1
MODE  
SW14  
SW15  
SW16  
SW17  
SW18  
C
D
C
D
C
D
B
B
B
E
E
E
A
A
A
F
F
F
9
8
9
8
9
8
0
0
0
1
1
1
ON  
OFF  
7
7
7
2
2
2
6
6
6
3
3
3
5
5
5
4
4
4
SW21  
SW22  
SW23  
SW24  
ON  
<E.g. 2> Signal Level: RS-232C, Baud Rate: 19200bps, Trans. Mode: Trans. Mode 1  
SW03  
SW04  
SW05  
SW06  
SW07  
SW08  
SW09  
SW10  
SW11  
SW12  
A1 SJ 7 1 C2 4 -R2  
A1 SJ 7 1 UC2 4 -R2  
STATION No  
10  
STATION No  
1
MODE  
C
D
C
D
C
D
B
B
B
E
E
E
A
A
A
ON  
OFF  
F
F
F
9
8
9
8
9
8
0
0
0
1
1
1
7
7
7
2
2
2
6
6
6
3
3
3
5
5
5
4
4
4
ON  
<E.g. 3> Baud Rate: 19200bps  
AJ 7 1 QC2 4  
SW01  
SW02  
SW03  
SW04  
SW05  
SW06  
SW07  
SW08  
STATION No  
10  
STATION No  
1
MODE  
A1 SJ 7 1 QC2 4  
AJ 7 1 QC2 4 N  
C
D
C
D
C
D
B
B
B
E
E
E
A
A
A
F
F
F
9
8
9
8
9
8
0
0
0
1
1
1
7
7
7
2
2
2
6
6
6
3
3
3
5
5
5
4
4
4
ON  
OFF  
SW09  
SW10  
SW11  
SW12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 MITSUBISHI PLC • 1  
2 - 19  
<E.g. 4> Signal Level: RS-422, Baud Rate: 19200bps, Trans. Mode: Trans. Mode 1  
ON  
A1 SJ 7 1 UC2 4 -R4  
A1 SJ 7 1 C2 4 -R4  
SW01  
SW02  
SW03  
SW04  
SW05  
SW06  
SW07  
SW08  
SW09  
SW10  
SW11  
SW12  
STATION No  
10  
STATION No  
1
MODE  
C
D
C
D
C
D
B
B
B
E
E
E
A
A
A
F
F
F
9
8
9
8
9
8
0
0
0
1
1
1
7
7
7
ON  
OFF  
2
2
2
6
6
6
3
3
3
5
5
5
4
4
4
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
(data register)  
(link register)  
(file register)  
TYPE  
0
Remarks  
D
W
R
1
2
TN (timer/current value)  
CN (counter/current value)  
SPU (special unit)  
3
4
5
Unit No.  
1
*
M
L
(internal relay)  
(latch relay)  
(link relay)  
6
7
B
X
Y
8
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
TS (timer/contact)  
TC (timer/coil)  
CS (counter/contact)  
CC (counter/coil)  
H
(link buffer)  
SD (special register)  
SM (special relay)  
SB (special link relay)  
SW (special link register)  
ZR  
QnA, QnH(Q) series only  
QnA, QnH(Q) series only  
QnA, QnH(Q) series only  
QnA, QnH(Q) series only  
QnA, QnH(Q) series only  
(file register [continuous access])  
1
The unit No. is required in addition to the memory type and the address.  
*
Convert a byte address into a word address to enter the data if the memory device of link unit  
is byte address.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 MITSUBISHI PLC • 1  
2 - 20  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
CD  
RD  
SD  
SG  
DR  
RS  
CS  
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
DR  
SG  
CD  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 MITSUBISHI PLC • 1  
2 - 21  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
PLC  
7
12  
SDA  
SDB  
+
SD  
SD  
-
13  
RDA  
RDB  
SG  
+
RD 24  
-
RD  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 4  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
)
7
12  
RDA  
SDA  
2
3
4
5
7
+
SD  
SD  
-
13  
DSRA  
DTRA  
SG  
+
RD 24  
-
RD  
25  
RDB 15  
SDB 16  
DSRB 17  
DTRB 18  
20  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 MITSUBISHI PLC • 2  
2 - 22  
MITSUBISHI PLC • 2  
8
(A/ QnA se rie s CPU )  
Con n ect ion  
Connect to the A/Q series CPU port.  
The communication parameter setting of POD is done automatically.  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
A2A, A3A  
Select PLC Type  
A2U, A3U, A4U  
A2US(H)  
A1N, A2N, A3N  
A3V, A73  
A3H, A3M  
RS-422 [UG200C-M]  
A series CPU  
made by Fuji Electric  
or  
[Wiring Diagram 1]  
A0J2H  
A1S, A1SJ(H), A2S(H)  
A2CCPUC24  
A1FX  
Q2A, Q3A, Q4A  
Q2AS(H)  
QnA series CPU  
Wh en t h e CPU is u pdat ed, or t h e specificat ion s are ch an ged, t h ere is som e  
possibilit y t h at POD can n ot be con n ect ed t o t h e PLC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 MITSUBISHI PLC • 2  
2 - 23  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
0
Remarks  
D
(data register)  
(link register)  
(file register)  
W
R
1
2
TN (timer/current value)  
CN (counter/current value)  
SPU (special unit)  
3
2
*
4
5
Unit No.  
1
*
M
L
(internal relay)  
(latch relay)  
(link relay)  
6
7
B
X
Y
8
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
TS (timer/contact)  
TC (timer/coil)  
CS (counter/contact)  
CC (counter/coil)  
SD (special register)  
SM (special relay)  
SB (special link relay)  
SW (special link register)  
ZR  
only in QnA  
only in QnA  
only in QnA  
only in QnA  
only in QnA  
(file register [continuous access])  
1
2
The unit No. is required in addition to the memory type and the address.  
*
*
Convert a byte address into a word address to enter the data if the memory device of link unit  
is byte address.  
File register(R) cannot be used in case of ROM operation of A series CPU.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 MITSUBISHI PLC • 2  
2 - 24  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
(connection of the UG200C-M)  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
7
)
+
2
3
4
5
7
RxD  
+
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
+
TxD  
DSR  
DTR  
SG  
-
+
+
+
RTS 14  
RTS 17  
CTS 18  
-
-
-
15  
16  
17  
RxD  
+
-
CTS 19  
TxD  
+
-
DSR  
RD 24  
-
-
RD  
25  
18  
20  
21  
DTR  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Note  
Accordin g t o ou r n oise t est s, t h e at t ach m en t of a ferrit e core im proves  
n oise volt age by 6 5 0 ~9 0 0 V an d aids in preven t in g com m u n icat ion errors.  
In case of direct connection with the CPU port of A/QnA series, be sure to attach the  
ferrite core to the cable between POD and the CPU port of A/QnA series for noise.  
A/QnA Series  
POD  
CPU  
Ferrite core  
A Ferrite core is sold as an optional accessory.  
A noise filter(ferrite core) is sold as an optional accessory. When you buy it, specify  
“ZCAT032-0930” as the model name.  
In consideration of such noise problems, it is recommended that the standard type link  
unit be used in such a case when the cable length of more than 15m is required.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 MITSUBISHI PLC • 2  
2 - 25  
Not es on u sin g UG0 0 P-DI (Du al Port In t erface)  
As the UG00P-DI is powered by a CPU, check that the electric capacity of the CPU is at 5V (power  
consumption: max. 350mA).  
The distance between the CPU and the UG00P-DI should be as short as possible (max. 1 to 1.5m).  
For wiring, take appropriate measures to eliminate noise.  
Specify the value more than 150 (=1.5 sec) in [Time-out Time] of [Comm. Parameter] in case of  
connecting POD to a UG00P-DI.  
MITSUBISHI A/QnA  
Series.  
CPU  
A6GPP, A7PHP, personal computer, etc.  
In case of direct connection with the  
CPU port of A/QnA series,  
plug the rear connector of UG00P-DI  
in the CPU port, or use the cable  
"UG200C-G" made by Fuji Electric.  
P
P
G
PLC  
G
D
Slide switch  
1 • • • A series  
2 • • • QnA series  
3 • • • FX series  
UG200C-G  
Note:  
*
Be sure to turn the power off  
when changing over of the  
sliding switch.  
POD  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 MITSUBISHI PLC • 3  
2 - 26  
MITSUBISHI PLC • 3  
9
(QnH se rie s CPU)  
Con n ect ion  
Connect to the QnH series CPU.  
The communication parameter setting of POD is done automatically.  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Select PLC Type  
QnH(A) series CPU Q06H-A  
Q02,  
RS-232C [UG00C-Q]  
or  
[Wiring Diagram 1]  
1
*
Q02H,  
Q06H,  
Q12H,  
Q25H  
QnH(Q) series CPU  
*1 About the ladder transfer function, refer to Appendix.  
Wh en t h e CPU is u pdat ed, or t h e specificat ion s are ch an ged, t h ere is som e  
possibilit y t h at POD can n ot be con n ect ed t o t h e PLC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 MITSUBISHI PLC • 3  
2 - 27  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
0
Remarks  
D
(data register)  
(link register)  
(file register)  
W
R
1
2
TN (timer/current value)  
CN (counter/current value)  
SPU (special unit)  
3
4
5
Unit No.  
1
*
M
L
(internal relay)  
(latch relay)  
(link relay)  
6
7
B
X
Y
8
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
TS (timer/contact)  
TC (timer/coil)  
CS (counter/contact)  
CC (counter/coil)  
SD (special register)  
SM (special relay)  
SB (special link relay)  
SW (special link register)  
ZR  
only in Q mode  
only in Q mode  
only in Q mode  
only in Q mode  
only in Q mode  
(file register [continuous access])  
1
The unit number is required in addition to the memory type and the address.  
*
Convert a byte address into a word address to enter the data if the memory device of link unit  
is byte address.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1 (connection of the UG00C-Q)  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
7
Minimum DIN 6pin (Male:  
)
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
SG  
1
2
5
3
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 MITSUBISHI PLC • 4  
2 - 28  
MITSUBISHI PLC • 4  
10  
(FX / FX2N / FX1S se rie s CPU)  
Con n ect ion  
Connect to the FX series CPU port.  
The communication parameter setting of POD is done automatically.  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Wiring Diagram  
CPU  
RS-232C [UG00C-X] made by Fuji Electric  
RS-422 [UG200C-M] made by Fuji Electric  
or [Wiring Diagram 1]  
FX1/2  
FX series CPU  
FX0N (tool port)  
RS-422 [UG00C-E] made by Fuji Electric  
or [Wiring Diagram 2]  
FX1N/2N  
(tool port)  
FX2NC (tool port)  
FX2N series CPU  
FX1S series CPU  
or  
[UG200C-M] made by Fuji Electric  
+ [FX-20P-CADP] made by MITSUBISHI  
FX1S (tool port)  
About the ladder transfer function, refer to Appendix.  
When the CPU is updated, or the specifications are changed, there is some possibility that  
POD cannot be connected to the PLC.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 MITSUBISHI PLC • 4  
2 - 29  
Available Mem ory  
FX1/2, FX0N, FX1S series CPU  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
(data register)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
TN (timer/current value)  
CN (counter/current value)  
32CN (counter 32bits)  
1
*
M
S
X
Y
(internal relay)  
(state)  
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
Read only  
TS (timer/contact)  
CS (counter/contact)  
DX (Data register)  
2
*
1
In case of the items which can display double word data (e.g. data display, graph, sampling),  
the data is managed as double word data.  
*
Both bit data and word data are managed as lower-half 16 bits data.  
Input : 16 upper-half bits are ignored.  
Output : “0” is written in the 16 upper-half bits.  
2
When use D1000 to 2999, select DX.  
*
FX2N, FX1N series  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
(data register)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TN (timer/current value)  
CN (counter/current value)  
32CN (counter 32bits)  
1
*
M
S
X
Y
(internal relay)  
(state)  
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
Read only  
TS (timer/contact)  
CS (counter/contact)  
1
In case of the items which can display double word data (e.g. data display, graph, sampling),  
the data is managed as double word data.  
*
Both bit data and word data are managed as lower-half 16 bits data.  
Input : 16 upper-half bits are ignored.  
Output : “0” is written in the 16 upper-half bits.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 MITSUBISHI PLC • 4  
2 - 30  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Use the cable, “UG00C-X”(3m), made by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. in case of RS-232C connection.  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 1 (connection of the UG200C-M)  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
7
)
+
2
3
4
5
7
RxD  
+
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
+
TxD  
DSR  
DTR  
SG  
-
+
+
+
RTS 14  
RTS 17  
CTS 18  
-
-
-
RxD  
15  
16  
17  
+
-
TxD  
CTS 19  
+
-
DSR  
RD 24  
-
RD  
-
25  
18  
20  
21  
DTR  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2 (connection of the UG00C-E )  
POD (CN1)  
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
Minimum DIN 8pin(Male:  
)
FD  
1
-
RxD  
1
+
SD  
SD  
12  
+
RxD  
TxD  
2
4
7
-
13  
-
+
RTS  
RTS  
CTS  
14  
17  
+
TxD  
-
18  
-
+
CTS 19  
+
RD 24  
-
RD  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Note  
Accordin g t o ou r n oise t est s, t h e at t ach m en t of a ferrit e core im proves  
n oise volt age by 6 5 0 ~9 0 0 V an d aids in preven t in g com m u n icat ion errors.  
In case of direct connection with the CPU port of A/QnA series, be sure to attach the  
ferrite core to the cable between POD and the CPU port of A/QnA series for noise.  
A/QnA Series  
POD  
CPU  
Ferrite core  
A Ferrite core is sold as an optional accessory.  
A noise filter(ferrite core) is sold as an optional accessory. When you buy it, specify  
“ZCAT032-0930” as the model name.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 MITSUBISHI PLC • 4  
2 - 31  
Not es on u sin g UG0 0 P-DI (Du al Port In t erface)  
As the UG00P-DI is powered by a CPU, check that the electric capacity of the CPU is at 5V (power  
consumption: max. 350mA).  
The distance between the CPU and the UG00P-DI should be as short as possible (max. 1 to 1.5m).  
For wiring, take appropriate measures to eliminate noise.  
Specify the value more than 150 (=1.5 s) in [Time-out Time] of [Comm. Parameter] in case of  
connecting POD to a UG00P-DI.  
FX Series CPU  
MELSEC FX2-24MT TRANSISTOR UNIT  
POWER  
RUN  
BATT.V  
A6GPP, A7PHP, personal computer, etc.  
In case of direct connection with the CPU port of FX1/2  
series, use the cable "UG200C-G" (separately sold).  
In case of direct connection with the CPU port of  
P
P
G
FX2N/1N/0N/1S series, use the cable "FX-20P-CADP"  
G
D
made by MITSUBISHI.  
UG200C-G  
Slide switch  
1 • • • A series  
2 • • • QnA series  
3 • • • FX series  
Note:  
*
Be sure to turn the power off  
when changing over of the  
sliding switch.  
POD  
When use the cable "UG00C-E", it is impossible to use the UG00P-DI.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 MITSUBISHI PLC • 5  
2 - 32  
MITSUBISHI PLC • 5  
11  
(FX se rie s link [A p rt] )  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Wiring Diagram  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
FX2N-232-BD  
FX2N-485-BD  
FX2N-422-BD  
FX1N-232-BD  
FX1N-485-BD  
FX1N-422-BD  
FX0N-232ADP  
FX0N-485ADP  
FX0N-232ADP  
FX0N-485ADP  
FX2N  
RS-422 [ UG00C-E ] made by Fuji Electric  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
FX1N  
FX1S  
FX series  
(A protocol)  
RS-422 [ UG00C-E ] made by Fuji Electric  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
FX0N  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
FX2NC  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
Even  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
7
7
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
Exclusive Protocol Communication (fixed)  
Normally RS-232C  
Provided (fixed)  
Function  
1
*
RS-232C  
H/W Type  
Sumcheck  
Trans. Mode 1  
Transmission Control Mode  
MODE 1  
1
When the link unit, FX2N-485-BD, FX2N-422-BD, FX1N-485-BD,FX1N-422-BD or  
FX0N-485-ADP is used, select [RS-485] in [Signal Level].  
*
At t h e [Det ail Set t in g] m en u of t h e [Com m . Param et er] dialog of UG0 0 S-CW,  
set t in g t h e valu e m ore t h an [2 ] in [Sen d Delay Tim e] is recom m en ded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 MITSUBISHI PLC • 5  
2 - 33  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
(data register)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TN (timer/current value)  
CN (counter/current value)  
32CN (counter 32bits)  
1
*
*
M
S
X
Y
(internal relay)  
(state)  
2
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
Read only  
TS (timer/contact)  
CS (counter/contact)  
1
2
The meaning of CN200~CN255 is the same as the meaning of 32CN(counter 32bits).  
*
*
In case of the items which can display double word data (e.g. data display, graph, sampling),  
the data is managed as double word data.  
Both bit data and a word data are managed as lower-half 16 bits data.  
Input : 16 upper-half bits are ignored.  
Output : “0” is written in the 16 upper-half bits.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 MITSUBISHI PLC • 5  
2 - 34  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Female:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
RD  
SD  
SG  
2
3
5
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
RD  
SG  
2
3
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Use the cable, “UG00C-E ”, made by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.  
RS-4 8 5  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
PLC  
7
12  
RDA  
SDA  
SG  
2
3
7
+
SD  
SD  
-
13  
+
RD 24  
RDB 15  
SDB 16  
-
RD  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 MITSUBISHI PLC • 6  
2 - 35  
MITSUBISHI PLC • 6  
12  
(A Link + Ne t 10)  
POD can access other CPUs on the NET II(/B) or NET/10 when POD is connected to one of the link units  
that the data link system or network system consists of.  
Select “A Link + Net10” as PLC setting when configuring the screen data on the panel editor.  
To access other CPU on the NET II (/B) or NET/10 from POD.  
• In case of NET II(/B), only the network which has the CPU with the link unit connected to the POD (e.g.  
No. 1) can be accessed.  
(Available CPU No.: 0 to 30)  
• In case of NET/10, other networks (No. 2, No. 3) can be accessed in addition to the network No. 1.  
(Available CPU No.: 1 to 30)  
To read/write the memories of the CPU(e.g. 1-1 of CPU) which has the link unit to be connected to the  
POD :  
Link Unit  
POD  
CPU  
(1-1)  
CPU  
(2-1)  
Set the CPU No. to “31” on the  
panel editor.  
CPU  
(1-5)  
CPU  
(2-5)  
Response time will be equivalent to  
the case of 1 : 1 communication.  
CPU  
(1-2)  
(2-2)  
Network No. 1  
Network No. 2  
CPU  
(1-4)  
CPU  
(2-4)  
Please note that response will be delayed  
due to the transient transmission when  
the CPU No. is set to other than “31”.  
CPU  
(2-3)  
(3-1)  
CPU  
(1-3)  
CPU  
(3-2)  
In this case, use [OUT_ENQ] command of the [SYS] to  
program the macro. A CPU from a different network  
cannot be accessed on the same screen.  
CPU  
(3-5)  
Network No. 3  
CPU  
(3-3)  
When accessing PLCs of other network numbers on  
NET/10, specify the network number to be connected  
with the screens Open Macro in Panel Editor.  
CPU  
(3-4)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 MITSUBISHI PLC • 6  
2 - 36  
Macro type to specify network • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • [OUT_ENQ] command of [SYS]  
F1 Memory  
n+0  
n+1  
n+2  
n+3  
0 (fixed)  
Specify network: 2 (fixed)  
System code  
Network No.  
The addresses n+0 and n+1 are fixed for 0 and 2.  
Specify n+2 [System code] to 1: NET/10 2: NET II(/B)  
Enter “0” to n+3 [Network No.] when n+2 [System code] indicates “2”, and “the number to be  
accessed” to n+3 [Network No.] when n+2 [System code] indicates “1”.  
No macros can include this command except Open Macro. Communication error will occur due to the  
execution of the netware change when this command is used in other kinds of macros.  
Refer to the “UGseries Manual <Function> (FEH376)” for further information on Macro.  
Also refer to MITSUBISHI's manual for network registration.  
See MITSUBISHI’s manual for details on the NET II(/B) data link system and the NET/10 network system.  
Available Mem ory  
See P2-16, “A/QnA series link units” and P2-22, “A/QnA series CPU port” for available memory of the PLC to  
be accessed.  
Note that CPU No. should be set on the UG00S-CW.  
Wirin g  
See the wiring diagrams on P2-16,17, “1 MITSUBISHI PLC • 1.”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 OMRON PLC • 1  
2 - 37  
OMRON PLC • 1  
13  
(C/ CV/ CS1 se rie s)  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Wiring Diagram  
CPU unit with a built-in  
RS-232C port (host link port)  
C20H, C28H, C40H  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
C120, C120F  
C200H  
C500, C500F  
C1000H  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
C120-LK201-V1  
C120-LK202-V1  
C2000, C2000H  
C200H  
C200H-LK201  
C200H-LK201-V1  
C200H-LK202  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
C200HS-CPU01,03  
C200HS-CPU21,23  
C200HS-CPU31,33  
C200H-LK202-V1  
C200HS-CPU21,23  
C200HS-CPU31,33  
CQM1-CPU21  
SYSMAC C  
CPU unit with a built-in  
RS-232C port (host link port)  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
CQM1-CPU41, 42, 43, 44  
C500, C500F  
C1000H  
C2000, C2000H  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
C500-LK203  
CPU unit with a built-in  
RS-232C port (host link port)  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
C200HX  
C200HG  
C200HE  
Communication board  
(C200HW-COM02~06)  
1
*
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 5]  
RS-232C interface  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
SRM1-C02  
CPM1A  
[CQM1-CIF01] *2  
made by OMRON  
CPU unit (peripheral port)  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 6]  
CPU unit with a built-in  
RS-232C port (host link port)  
CV500, CV1000  
RS-232C  
SYSMAC CV CV2000  
CVM1  
PORT1 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
PORT2 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
CV500-LK201  
RS-422  
PORT2 [Wiring Diagram 5]  
CPU unit with a built-in  
RS-232C port (host link port)  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
CS1W-SCU21  
SYSMAC CS1  
CS1  
Communication board  
(CS1W-SCB41)  
1
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 7]  
*
CPU unit with a built-in  
RS-232C port (host link port)  
CJ1 , CJ1M  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
1
2
Cannot be connected to POD by multi-link connection.  
*
*
Exchange the shell, the side of D-sub25. (recommendation : 17J-25 made by DDK)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 OMRON PLC • 1  
2 - 38  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
0
Even  
7 (ASCII)  
2
0
Even  
7
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
2
Command Level  
3 (fixed)  
1 : n (fixed)  
1:1/1:n Protocol  
Synchronizing Switch  
CTS Switch  
Internal Synchronization (fixed)  
0V (normally ON) (fixed)  
OFF (fixed)  
5V Supply Switch  
Terminal Resistor  
ON for RS-422  
For the SYSMAC- Series and COM1 Series, set “0001” into DM6645 and “0304” (HEX) into DD6646 on  
the RS-232C port at the CPU side to use the recommended communication settings indicated in the table  
above.  
*
For the CS1 Series, store the values which match the communication setting in D32000 (D32010) and the  
following when the communication board is used for communication; in the memory space corresponding  
to machine No. when the communication unit is used.  
If [SYSMAC C] is selected at the [Select PLC Type] dialog, set the [Trans. Mode] for [Detail] in the  
•
[Comm. Parameter] in UG00S-CW.  
Trans. Mode  
Trans. Mode 1  
Trans. Mode 2  
Contents  
w/o sign BCD  
1
w/+/ sign BCD *  
-
1
w/+/  
-
sign BCD  
*
It is possible to display the data for PLC data with signs + and  
-
.
When higher 4 bits of the memory are [F or A], treat the data as the minus data.  
[F] : regards higher 4 bits of the memory as [ 0]  
[A] : regards higher 4 bits of the memory as [ 1]  
-
-
range  
1 word :  
2 words :  
-
1999 to +9999  
•
-19999999 to +99999999  
<Ex.>  
PLC memory  
0000 to 9999  
Display of POD  
0 to 9999  
F001 to F999  
-1 to  
-999  
A000 to A999  
-1000 to  
-1999  
00000000 to 99999999  
F0000001 to F9999999  
A0000000 to A9999999  
0 to 99999999  
-1 to  
-9999999  
-10000000 to  
-
19999999  
How to set : Num. Display  
•
[Input Type]  
BCD  
[Display Type] DEC(w/ -sign, w/ +sign)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 OMRON PLC • 1  
2 - 39  
Available Mem ory  
C
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
DM (data memory)  
CH (input/output relay)  
HR (holding relay)  
LR (latch relay)  
0
1
2
3
AR (alarm relay)  
4
T
(timer/current value)  
5
C
(counter/current value)  
6
EMn (extensional data memory)  
TU (timer/contact)  
7
*1  
9
Read only  
Read only  
CU (counter/contact)  
10  
CV  
Memory  
DM (data memory)  
CH (input/output relay)  
AR (alarm relay)  
TYPE  
Remarks  
0
1
4
T
(timer/current value)  
5
C
(counter/current value)  
6
EMn (extensional data memory)  
TU (timer/contact)  
7
*1  
9
Read only  
Read only  
CU (counter/contact)  
10  
CS1  
Memory  
DM (data memory)  
CH (input/output relay)  
TYPE  
Remarks  
0
1
H
A
T
(holding relay)  
2
(alarm relay)  
4
(timer/current value)  
(counter/current value)  
5
C
6
EMn (extensional data memory)  
(Internal Relay)  
7
1
*
W
8
TU (timer/contact)  
9
Read only  
Read only  
CU (counter/contact)  
10  
1
When using EMn (extensional data memory), specify the bank  
number (CV: 0 to 7, CS1: 0 to C).  
*
<E.g.> EM0:30000  
The assigned memory is indicated while editing the screen as  
illustrated:  
Address No.  
Colon  
Bank No.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 OMRON PLC • 1  
2 - 40  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
)
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
9
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 OMRON PLC • 1  
2 - 41  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 4  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
7
RDB  
SG  
1
3
5
6
9
+
SD 12  
-
+
-
SD  
RD 24  
RD  
13  
SDB  
RDA  
SDA  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 5  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
7
SG  
9
8
6
2
1
+
SD 12  
RDB  
RDA  
SDB  
SDA  
-
+
-
SD  
RD 24  
RD  
13  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 6  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
7
SG  
RDB  
RDA  
SDB  
SDA  
RS  
9
8
6
2
1
4
5
+
SD 12  
SD 13  
RD 24  
RD  
-
+
-
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
CS  
Wirin g Diagram 7  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
FG  
1
+
SD 12  
RDB  
RDA  
SDB  
SDA  
8
6
2
1
-
+
-
SD  
RD 24  
RD  
13  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 OMRON PLC • 2  
2 - 42  
OMRON PLC • 2  
14  
(OMRON-CS1 DNA)  
CS1  
(2-2)  
CS1  
(1-2)  
When connect the POD to CS1 on a network, the POD can also  
access the other CS1 on a network.  
CS1  
(1-3)  
(2-1)  
Network No.1  
Network No.2  
CS1  
(2-3)  
CS1  
(1-1)  
CS1  
(2-4)  
POD  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Link Unit  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
CPU unit with a built-in  
RS-232C port (host link port)  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
CS1W-SCU21  
SYSMAC CS1 DNA  
CS1  
Communication board  
(CS1W-SCB41)  
* 1  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 7]  
*1 Cannot be connected to POD by multi-link connection.  
Available Mem ory  
See [Available Memory] of CS1 in [13 OMRON PLC • 1].  
Wirin g  
See [Wiring] in [13 OMRON PLC • 1].  
UG0 0 S-CW Set t in g  
Select [System Setting] from [Item], and click [Comm. Parameter]. The [Comm. Parameter]  
dialog is displayed. Set [Connection] to [1:n] in the [Detail] tab window.  
Select [System Setting] from [Item], and click [Network Table]. [Edit Network Table] is displayed.  
Double click the [No.]. The dialog is displayed. Register the CS1 on the network.  
double click  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 Sharp PLC • 1  
2 - 43  
Sha rp PLC • 1  
15  
Available PLC  
Link Unit  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
JW50, JW70, JW100  
JW50H, JW70H  
JW100H  
ZW-10CM  
JW-10CM  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
JW  
series  
JW20  
JW-31CUH  
JW-21CM  
JW70, JW100  
JW70H, JW100H  
JW100/70H  
COM port  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
CPU communication port  
JW20(JW22CU)  
JW20H(JW22CU)  
JW20  
COM port  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
19200bps  
0 for STA. NO x10, 1 for x1  
0
Parity  
Even  
Even  
RS-422  
Data Length  
4-wire system (fixed)  
7
7
2
Stop Bit  
Error Check  
2
Sumcheck (fixed)  
Command mode (fixed)  
Transmission Control  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 Sharp PLC • 1  
2 - 44  
Swit ch Set t in g of Lin k Un it  
Baud rate: 19200bps  
Swtich  
SW0  
Setting  
4
Contents  
Command mode  
Station address (lower half)  
Station address (upper half)  
Not used  
SW1  
1
SW2  
0
SW3-1  
SW3-2  
SW3-3  
SW3-4  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
4-wire system  
Not used  
Even parity  
Baud rate  
0: 19200 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400  
4: 1200 5: 600  
SW4  
SW7  
0
Teminating resistance provided  
ON  
PLC Syst em Mem ory Set t in g (in case of a com m u n icat ion port )  
Baud rate: 19200bps  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
System memory  
#0236  
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
#0237  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
X9XXX (register)  
0
1
2
3
7
XXXXX (relay)  
as word device  
EXXXX (self-diagnosis)  
bXXXX (timer counter)  
Fn (file register)  
1
*
1To set up Fn (file register), input [File No.] + [: (colon)] + [address]  
<E.g.> F1 : 00002  
*
Address  
Colon  
File No.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 Sharp PLC • 1  
2 - 45  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
)
SXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
12  
14  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
1
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
)
+
+
SD 12  
TXD 10  
TXD 11  
RXD 12  
RXD 13  
-
-
SD  
13  
+
+
RD 24  
-
-
RD  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
1
PLC  
L1  
L2  
L3  
L4  
+
SD 12  
-
SD  
13  
RD 24  
+
-
RD  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
GND  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 Sharp PLC • 2  
2 - 46  
Sha rp PLC • 2  
16  
(JW-32CUH/ 33CUH)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Select PLC Type  
RS-232C  
PG/COMM2 [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422  
JW20  
COM port  
JW-32CUH  
JW-33CUH  
Communication port  
on a CPU unit  
PG/COMM1 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
PG/COMM2 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
1
1
Parity  
Even  
Even  
RS-422  
Data Length  
4-wire system (fixed)  
7
7
2
Stop Bit  
Error Check  
2
Sumcheck (fixed)  
Command mode (fixed)  
Transmission Control  
PLC Syst em Mem ory Set t in g (in case of a com m u n icat ion port )  
Set communication condition in the system memory #234/235(for PG/COMM port 1) or #236/237(for PG/  
COMM port 2) to communicate with a personal computer.  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
X9XXX (register)  
0
1
2
3
7
XXXXX (relay)  
as word device  
EXXXX (self-diagnosis)  
bXXXX (timer counter)  
Fn (file register)  
1
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 Sharp PLC • 2  
2 - 47  
1To set up Fn (file register), input [File No.] + [: (colon)] + [address].  
<E.g.> F1 : 00002  
*
Address  
Colon  
File No.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
)
SD  
RD  
2
4
7
8
SG  
RTS  
CTS 12  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
1
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
)
+
+
+
SD 12  
SD  
RD  
RD  
3
9
-
SD  
13  
+
-
RD 24  
10  
11  
-
-
SD  
RD  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 HITACHI PLC • 1  
2 - 48  
HITACHI PLC • 1  
17  
(HIDIC H se rie s)  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
COMM-2H  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
PERIPHERAL port  
on a CPU module  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
HIDIC H series CPU  
HIDIC-H  
*
1 [EH-RS05] cable made by HITACHI  
+ RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
EH150  
H-252C on a CPU module  
PERIPHERAL 1  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
PERIPHERAL 2  
*
2 [CNCOM-05] cable made by HITACHI  
+ RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
1When using [EH-RS05] cable made by HITACHI, connect the cable of [Wiring Diagram 1] to the  
D-sub 15 pins side of [EH-RS05] to communicate with POD.  
*
*
2When using [CNCOM-05] cable made by HITACHI, connect the cable of [Wiring Diagram 1] to  
the D-sub 15 pins side of [CNCOM-05] to communicate with POD.  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
COMM-2H  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
0 for both STATION 10 and  
1
0
Parity  
Even  
MODE7  
MODE9  
7 (ASCII)  
1
Even  
1
*
RS-232C  
RS-422  
Protocol 2 w/ Port  
Transmission  
Control Mode  
Protocol 2 w/ Port  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
7
1
Transmission  
Code  
Sumcheck  
Provided (fixed)  
If “Transmission control mode” is any other type except the above, specify “Transmission control  
code” as below.  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
MODE1  
MODE2  
MODE9  
Protocol 1 w/o Port  
Protocol 1 w/ Port  
Protocol 2 w/o Port  
RS-232C  
RS-422  
Transmission  
Control Mode  
1
*
Protocol 1 w/ Port  
MODE2  
1
Cannot be connected to POD by multi-link connection.  
*
CPU module  
Peripheral port is only available with “pattern 1.”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 HITACHI PLC • 1  
2 - 49  
Swit ch Set t in g  
Baud rate  
: 19200bps  
MODE switch : To connect to both RS-232C and RS-422, set MODE switch to 9.  
RS-232C(pattern 2, w/o)  
RS-422(pattern 2, with port)  
ST No. switch : Choose “0” for both 10 and 1.  
Dip Switch  
Switch  
Setting  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
Contents  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit length  
Same as POD  
(normally 19200bps)  
ON  
Parity provided  
Even  
ON  
ON  
Stop bit 1  
OFF  
ON  
Sumcheck provided  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
WR (internal word output)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X
Y
L
(external bit input)  
(external bit output)  
(bit CPU link area)  
(bit data area)  
WX as word device  
WY as word device  
WL as word device  
WM as word device  
M
TC (timer counter/elapsed time)  
(relay)  
R
TD (timer counter/contact)  
WN (network input/output)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 HITACHI PLC • 1  
2 - 50  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
5
7
SD  
RD  
RS  
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
CS  
DR  
PHL  
SG  
PV12 14  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
1
PLC  
+
SD 12  
TxDP  
TxDN  
RxDP  
RxDN  
-
SD  
13  
+
RD 24  
-
RD  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 HITACHI PLC • 2  
2 - 51  
HITACHI PLC • 2  
18  
(HIDIC-S10  
)
Available PLC  
Host Link H-7338  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
S10 2  
Interface on a CPU unit  
Interface on a CPU unit  
RS-232C connector on a CPU unit  
LQE060  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
HIDIC-S10/2alpha  
HIDIC-S10/ABS  
S10 mini  
1
*
ABS  
1Specify the memory by absolute addresses. For further information, refer to the relevant PLC manual.  
*
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Setting of PLC  
7
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
Baud Rate  
Available Mem ory  
HIDIC-S10 2 /S10 mini  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
FW (work register)  
0
X
Y
R
G
K
T
(input relay)  
1
XW as word device  
YW as word device  
RW as word device  
GW as word device  
KW as word device  
TW as word device  
UW as word device  
CW as word device  
(output relay)  
2
(internal relay)  
3
(global link)  
4
(keep relay)  
5
(on-delay timer contact)  
(one shot timer contact)  
(up/down counter contact)  
6
U
C
7
8
TS (on-delay timer set value)  
TC (on-delay timer elapsed value)  
US (one shot timer set value)  
UC (one shot timer elapsed value)  
CS (up/down counter set value)  
CC (up/down counter elapsed value)  
DW (data register)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 HITACHI PLC • 2  
2 - 52  
E
S
J
(event register)  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
EW as word device  
SW as word device  
JW as word device  
QW as word device  
MW as word device  
(system register)  
(transfer register)  
(receive register)  
(extension input register)  
Q
M
HIDIC ABS  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
0E  
06  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
D-sub 9pin (Female:  
)
RD  
SD  
SG  
2
3
5
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 HITACHI PLC • 2  
2 - 53  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
PLC  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 9pin(Female:  
)
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
1
2
3
4
5
CD  
RD  
SD  
ER  
SG  
DR  
RS  
CS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SG  
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
For connection to the S10x series, use a 50 Ω(1/2W) resistance as shown below.  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
1
PLC  
UTX H  
+
SD 12  
-
SD  
13  
UTX L  
+
RD 24  
50Ω URX H  
-
RD  
25  
URX L  
50Ω  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 54  
19 Matsushita PLC  
Ma tsushita PLC  
19  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
FP1  
Link Unit  
Wiring Diagram  
RS-232C port  
on a CPU unit  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
AFP3462  
AFP3463  
FP3  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
FP5  
AFP5462  
RS-232C port  
on a CPU unit  
FP10  
AFP5462  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C port  
on a CPU unit  
MEWNET  
FP10S  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
AFP3462  
AFP3463  
RS-232C tool port  
on a CPU unit  
RS-232C cable made by Matsushita  
AFC8513  
FP0  
FP2  
RS-232C port  
on a CPU unit  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-232C tool port  
on a CPU unit  
RS-232C cable made by Matsushita  
AFC8513  
RS-232C port  
on a CPU unit  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
"0" for 10, "1" for  
Even  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
1
1
Even  
7
Parity  
Data Bit  
Stop Bit  
7 (ASCII)  
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Transmission Control  
Control Signal  
Computer link system (fixed)  
Invalid (fixed)  
If a tool port (the ladder port for RS-232C) of FP0 is used, the range of PLC parameter setting is  
limited as below. Adjust PLC parameter setting to comm. parameter setting of POD.  
*
Baud rate  
Parity  
: 9600, 19200bps  
: Odd (fixed)  
Data bit  
Stop bit  
: 8 (7 can be selected. Normally 8.)  
: 1 (fixed)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19 Matsushita PLC  
2 - 55  
Swit ch Set t in g of Lin k Un it  
No  
1
Setting  
ON  
Contents  
Same as POD  
(normally 19200bps)  
2
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
3
4
Data length 7  
Parity provided  
Even  
5
6
ON  
7
Stop bit 1  
OFF  
OFF  
8
CS, CD invalid  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
DT (data register)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
X
Y
R
L
(external input relay)  
(external output relay)  
(internal relay)  
WX as word device, read only  
WY as word device  
WR as word device, special relay included  
WL as word device  
(link relay)  
LD (link register)  
FL (file register)  
SV (timer/counter set value)  
EV (timer/counter elapsed value)  
T
(counter/contact)  
(counter/contact)  
Read only  
Read only  
C
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 56  
19 Matsushita PLC  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
CD  
ER  
8
9
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
PLC  
SD  
RD  
SG  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 4  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
1
PLC  
+
+
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
-
-
SD  
+
RD  
-
RD  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20 YOKOGAWA PLC • 1  
2 - 57  
YOKOGAWA PLC • 1  
20  
(FA-500)  
Available PLC  
Link Unit  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Select PLC Type  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
LC01-0N  
LC02-0N  
FA500  
FA500  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
1
1
Even  
7
Parity  
Even  
7
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Sumcheck  
Provided (fixed)  
None (fixed)  
None (fixed)  
Terminal Character  
Protection Function  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
(data register)  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(common register)  
TP (timer/current value)  
TS (timer/set value)  
CP (counter/current value)  
CS (counter/set value)  
X
Y
I
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
(internal relay)  
(external relay)  
E
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 58  
20 YOKOGAWA PLC • 1  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
1
2
3
4
5
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
DR  
SG  
ER  
2
3
4
5
SG  
7
6
7
20  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
PLC  
RDB  
RDA  
SDB  
SDA  
SG  
7
+
SD  
12  
-
SD  
13  
24  
25  
+
RD  
-
RD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21 YOKOGAWA PLC • 2  
2 - 59  
YOKOGAWA PLC • 2  
21  
( FA-M3 / FA-M3R )  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Wiring Diagram  
Programming tool port  
Cable made by YOKOGAWA  
1
*
on a CPU module  
[KM11-2N]  
2
*
FA-M3  
FA-M3  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
F3LC01-1N  
F3LC11-1N  
F3LC11-2N  
Programming tool port  
on a CPU module  
Cable made by YOKOGAWA  
[KM11-2N]  
FA-M3 R  
FA-M3R  
F3LC12-1F  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
1
2
CPU types which can be connected directly to programming tool port on a CPU module are  
“F3SP21-0N,” “F3SP25-2N” and “F3SP35-5N.”  
*
*
When the link unit, F3LC01-1N, is used, the communication setting and available memory are  
the same as the contents of “20 YOKOGAWA PLC • 1(FA-500),” provided that B(common  
register) cannot be used.  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
Even  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
Even  
*
Data Length  
7
7
1
Transmission  
Code  
Stop Bit  
Sumcheck  
1
Provided  
None (fixed)  
None (fixed)  
Provided  
Terminal Character  
Protection Function  
When using programming tool port on a CPU module for direct connection to POD, set [Data  
Length] as [8-bit] in the [comm. Parameter] dialog of POD because data length “8” is fixed. Also,  
specify the “CPU Communication Port” setting of “Configuration” in the ladder making tool as  
follows.  
*
Personal Computer Link Function : Use  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 60  
21 YOKOGAWA PLC • 2  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
R
V
W
Z
(data register)  
(common register)  
(index register)  
(link register)  
0
1
2
3
(special register)  
4
TP (down timer current value)  
TS (timer set value)  
5
6
Read only  
CP (down counter current value)  
CS (down counter set value)  
7
8
X
Y
I
(input relay)  
9
(output relay)  
(internal relay)  
(common relay)  
(link relay)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
E
L
M
B
(special relay)  
(file register)  
The CPU No. is required in addition to the memory type/address. The assigned memory is  
indicated while editing the screen as illustrated:  
*
CPU No.  
(E.g. 1 : D00001)  
Address  
Memory Type  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21 YOKOGAWA PLC • 2  
2 - 61  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
RD  
SD  
ER  
SG  
DR  
RS  
CS  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
PLC  
RDB  
RDA  
SDB  
SDA  
SG  
7
+
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
-
+
RD  
-
RD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 62  
22 YASKAWA PLC • 1  
YASKAWA PLC • 1  
22  
(m e m o b us)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
JAMSC-IF60  
Select PLC Type  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
JAMSC-IF61  
JAMSC-IF611  
GL60 series  
JAMSC-IF612  
JAMSC-IF613  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
Memobus  
Memobus port  
on a CPU module  
GL120,  
GL130 series  
JAMSC  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
-120NOM27100  
PROGIC-8  
PORT2 on a CPU unit  
Other kinds of MEMOBUS unit can be connected.  
*
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
1
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
1
Parity  
Even  
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8 (fixed)  
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
CRC (fixed)  
0 (fixed)  
Error Check  
Port Delay Timer  
Select [TYPE 1] or [TYPE 2] from [Trans. Mode] in [Comm. Parameter] of the UG00S-CW.  
Contents  
PLC Type  
Setting of POD  
Type 1  
GL60 series, PROGIC-8  
GL120/130 series  
Same as before  
Type 2  
Standard binary mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22 YASKAWA PLC • 1  
2 - 63  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
4
3
R
A
0
D
1
7
(word device)  
(input register)  
(link register)  
(extension register)  
(coil)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Constant register included  
(link coil)  
(input relay)  
(constant register)  
Read only  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
1
2
3
4
5
)
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
CTS  
SG  
7
DSR  
SGND  
DTR  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 64  
22 YASKAWA PLC • 1  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
1
2
3
4
5
)
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
GND  
DTR  
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
SG  
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
)
+
7
TXD  
RXD  
RXD  
SG  
2
3
6
7
9
+
+
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
-
-
+
RD  
-
-
RD  
TXD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 4  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
)
+
TXD  
7
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
+
+
RXD  
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
-
RXDRT  
-
+
RXD  
RD  
-
RD  
SG  
TXRD  
-
TXD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23 YASKAWA PLC • 2  
2 - 65  
YASKAWA PLC • 2  
23  
(CP9200SH/ MP900)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Link Unit  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
[Wiring Diagram 2]  
CP-217IF  
CP9200SH  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
CP9200SH  
/MP900  
Memobus port  
on a CPU module  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
MP920,  
MP930  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
217IF  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
1
1
Even  
8
Parity  
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
CRC (fixed)  
0 (fixed)  
Error Check  
Port Delay Timer  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
MW (word device)  
IW (input register)  
MB (coil)  
TYPE  
Remarks  
Read only  
Read only  
0
1
4
6
IB (input coil)  
When setting the MB/IB memories , set the bit number by HEX .  
MBxxxx  
DEC  
Bit No. : HEX  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 66  
23 YASKAWA PLC • 2  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
CP217IF (CN1)  
217IF (CN1/2)  
D-sub 9pin (Male:  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
1
2
3
4
5
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
DR  
SG  
CD  
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
SG  
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
CP217IF (CN2)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
1
2
3
4
5
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CS  
SG  
7
DSR  
SG  
CD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
CP217IF (CN3)  
MR-8 (Male:  
FG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
1
)
12  
13  
24  
25  
RX-  
RX+  
TX-  
1
2
6
7
TX+  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 4  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
217IF (CN3)  
MR-8 (Male:  
)
)
FG  
1
RX-  
RX+  
RXR+  
TRX+  
TX-  
1
SG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
7
2
4
5
6
7
8
12  
13  
24  
25  
TX+  
SG  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24 TOYOPUC PLC  
2 - 67  
TOYOPUC PLC  
24  
Available PLC  
PLC  
Link Unit  
CMP-LINK  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
L2/PC2 Series  
PC3J  
TOYOPUC  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 1]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
0
Even  
7
0
Parity  
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
7
2
Transmission  
Code  
2
Set the [Trans. Mode] for [Detail] in the [Comm. Parameter].  
· PC3J  
: Select [Single Data Area] or [Split Data Area].  
: Select [Single Data Area].  
· L2/PC2 series  
Trans. Mode  
Contents  
Single Data Area  
Split Data Area  
Data area is common.  
Divide each PLC device into a program file.  
Swit ch Set t in g  
Baud rate: 19200bps  
Switch  
SW1  
Setting  
Contents  
0
0
Station address (lower half)  
Station address (upper half)  
SW2  
Baud rate  
SW3  
1
1 : 19200 2 : 9600 3 : 4800  
4 : 2400 5 : 1200 6 : 600  
Switch  
SET2  
SET3  
Short bar  
Provided  
Provided  
Contents  
Data bit 7  
Stop bit 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 68  
24 TOYOPUC PLC  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
R
B
N
X
Y
M
K
L
(data register)  
0
(link register)  
1
(file register)  
2
(current value register)  
(input relay)  
3
4
WX as word device  
WY as word device  
WM as word device  
WK as word device  
WL as word device  
WT as word device  
WC as word device  
(output relay)  
5
(internal relay)  
6
(keep relay)  
7
(link relay)  
8
T
(counter/contact)  
(counter/contact)  
(extension data register)  
(extension set value register)  
9
C
U
H
10  
11  
12  
EN (extension current valueregister)  
EX (extension input relay)  
EY (extension output relay)  
EM (extension internal relay)  
EK (extension keep relay)  
EL (extension link relay)  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
WEX as word device  
WEY as word device  
WEM as word device  
WEK as word device  
WEL as word device  
WET as word device  
WEC as word device  
ET (extension counter/contact)  
EC (extension counter/contact)  
V
(special register)  
21  
WV as word device  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24 TOYOPUC PLC  
2 - 69  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
PLC  
+
7
+
-
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
-
0V  
+
RD  
-
RD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Screen Edit in g (Mem ory In pu t )  
If [Split Data Area] is selected at the [Trans. Mode], the [PRG No] setting is available at the [Memory Input]  
dialog.  
range : 1 to 3  
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 70  
25 Koyo PLC  
Ko yo PLC  
25  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Wiring Diagram  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
PLC  
Link Unit  
SU-5/5E/6B/5M/6M  
SU-5E/6B  
U01-DM  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 7]  
Port 1 on a CPU unit  
SU-5M/6M  
SZ-4  
Port 3 on a CPU unit  
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 8]  
RS-232C  
Program transfer cable made by Koyo [S-30JG-E]  
+
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
Convert connector cable made by Koyo [S-15CNJ]  
RS-232C  
SU/SG  
Program transfer cable made by Koyo [S-30JG-E]  
+
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
SZ-4M  
Convert connector cable made by Koyo [S-15CNJ]  
+
Convert connector made by Koyo [S-15HCNP1]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
G01-DM  
SG-8  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
Port on a CPU unit  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 6]  
Universal  
communication port  
PZ3  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
U01-DM  
G01-DM  
SR-T  
SR-6T (TOYOTA version)  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
SR-T  
(K prt)  
Terminal blocks  
on a CPU unit  
SR-1T (TOYOTA version)  
SU-5E/6B  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 5]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 7]  
Port 1 on a CPU unit  
Programmer port  
on a CPU unit  
RS-232C  
Program transfer cable made by Koyo [S-30JG-E]  
SU-5M/6M  
Port 3 on a CPU unit  
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 8]  
RS-232C  
SU/SG  
(K-Sequence)  
Port 1 on a CPU unit  
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
Program transfer cable made by Koyo [S-30JG-E]  
SZ-4  
+
Convert connector cable made by Koyo [S-15CNJ]  
Port 1 on a CPU unit  
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
RS-232C  
Program transfer cable made by Koyo [S-30JG-E]  
SZ-4M  
+
Convert connector cable made by Koyo [S-15CNJ]  
+
Convert connector made by Koyo [S-15HCNP1]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25 Koyo PLC  
2 - 71  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
"0" for x 10, "1" for x 1  
Odd  
1
Odd  
8
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Host link system (fixed)  
Function  
0 (fixed)  
Response Delay Time  
Time-out  
None (fixed)  
HEX (fixed)  
ASCII/HEX  
Available Mem ory  
SU/SG , SU/SG(K-Sequence)  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
R
I
(data register)  
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
(internal relay)  
(stage)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Q
M
S
GI (global inputs)  
GQ (global outputs)  
T
(timer/contact)  
C
(counter/contact)  
SR-1T/SR-T (K prt)  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
X
Y
M
S
K
L
(data register)  
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
(internal relay)  
(stage)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X/Y common use  
X/Y common use  
(keep relay)  
(link relay)  
T
(timer/contact)  
(counter/contact)  
C
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 72  
25 Koyo PLC  
Swit ch Set t in g  
U-01DM  
On-line/off-line switch: on-line  
UNIT ADR switch: “0” for x 10, “1” for x 1  
SW4 Dip Switch:  
No  
1
Setting  
ON  
Contents  
Same as POD  
(normally 19200bps)  
2
ON  
3
ON  
4
Parity provided  
Self-diagnosis  
ON  
5
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
6
Response delay time  
0msec  
7
8
SW5 Dip Switch:  
No  
1
Setting  
OFF  
Contents  
Master/slave control  
Slave  
2
OFF  
3
OFF  
Communication time-out  
HEX mode  
4
OFF  
G-01DM  
On-line/off-line switch: on-line  
Short plug 1  
Short plug 2  
: open  
RS-232C : ENABLE  
RS-422  
: DISENABLE  
SW1 Dip Switch:  
No  
1
Setting  
ON  
Contents  
2
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
3
4
Unit No. 01  
5
6
7
8
1 : N  
9
Slave  
SW2 Dip Switch:  
No  
1
Setting  
ON  
Contents  
Same as POD  
(normally 19200bps)  
2
ON  
3
ON  
4
ON  
Parity provided  
Self-diagnosis  
5
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
6
Turn-around delay  
7
Response delay time 0msec  
8
9
HEX mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25 Koyo PLC  
2 - 73  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
1
*
FG  
1
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
0V  
2
3
4
5
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
1 High density D-sub 15pin  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
*
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
)
7
0V  
7
+
+
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
RTS 10  
-
RTS 11  
-
+
+
CTS 12  
CTS 13  
OUT 14  
OUT 15  
RD  
-
RD  
-
+
-
-
IN  
16  
17  
24  
25  
+
IN  
IN  
Use twist shielded cables.  
-
*
150Ω  
+
IN  
Wirin g Diagram 4  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
)
7
0V  
7
+
+
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
OUT 14  
OUT 15  
-
-
-
+
IN  
16  
17  
RD  
-
RD  
+
IN  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 74  
25 Koyo PLC  
Wirin g Diagram 5  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
PLC  
FG  
T1  
7
+
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
-
T2  
+
T3  
RD  
-
RD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 6  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
1
*
FG  
SG  
1
)
-
7
RXD  
6
+
SD  
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
0V  
7
+
-
TXD  
9
-
+
TXD  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
RD  
-
RD  
+
RTS  
RTS  
RXD  
-
+
+
CTS  
Use twist shielded cables.  
1 High density D-sub 15pin  
*
*
-
CTS  
Wirin g Diagram 7  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
SG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
7
SG  
7
9
12  
13  
24  
25  
RXD+  
RXD-  
10  
CTS1+ 11  
TXD1+ 14  
TXD1- 16  
RTS1+ 18  
RTS1- 19  
CTS1+ 23  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Wirin g Diagram 8  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
SG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
7
SG  
7
12  
13  
24  
25  
TXD3+ 12  
TXD3- 13  
RXD3+ 24  
RXD3- 25  
In case SU-6M, it is possible  
to use terminal blocks.  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26 Allen-Bradley PLC • 1  
2 - 75  
Alle n-Bra d le y PLC • 1  
26  
(PLC-5 se rie s)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Link Unit  
1785-KE  
1770-KF2  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
PLC-5  
PLC-5  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
0
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
0
Parity  
Even  
Even  
RS-232C  
RS-422  
Transmission  
Control Mode  
Not available with 1785-KE  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
1
8
1
Transmission  
Code  
Protocol  
Full duplex (fixed)  
BCC (fixed)  
NO (fixed)  
Error Check  
Response  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 76  
26 Allen-Bradley PLC • 1  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
N
B
(integer)  
(bit)  
0
1
T.ACC (timer/current value)  
T.PRE (timer/set value)  
2
3
C.ACC (counter/current value)  
C.PRE (counter/set value)  
4
5
I
(input)  
6
O
S
T
C
R
(output)  
7
(status)  
8
(timer/control)  
(counter/control)  
(control/control)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
R.LEN (control/data length)  
R.POS (control/data position)  
D
A
(BCD)  
(ASCáU)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Swit ch Set t in g  
1785-KE  
SW1 (protocol)  
No  
1
Setting  
ON  
Contents  
2
BCC, Even, no  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
3
4
Duplicate message unacceptable  
Handshaking signal ignored  
Diagnosis execution  
5
OFF  
ON  
6
SW2 (port)  
Specify the port for 1785-KE. (This port should not be duplicated in the network.)  
No  
1
Setting  
ON  
Contents  
1st digit (octal)  
2
ON  
3
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
2nd digit (octal)  
3rd digit (octal)  
4
5
6
7
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26 Allen-Bradley PLC • 1  
2 - 77  
SW3 (network link transmission speed)  
Adjust the setting according to the network you are using.  
No  
1
Setting  
ON  
Contents  
Data highway (57.6k bps)  
2
ON  
3
ON  
Link transmission speed (19.2k bps)  
Local/remote selection  
4
ON  
5
ON  
6
ON  
SW4 (spare)  
No  
1
Setting  
OFF  
Contents  
2
OFF  
Normally OFF (for expansion)  
3
OFF  
4
OFF  
1770-KF2  
SW1 (protocol)  
No  
1
Setting  
ON  
Contents  
Protocol  
2
Protocol  
OFF  
ON  
3
Duplicated message unacceptable  
Handshaking signal ignored  
Protocol  
4
OFF  
OFF  
5
SW2, SW3, SW4 (port)  
Specify the port for 1770-KF2. (This port should not be duplicated in the network.)  
SW5 (network link transmission speed)  
Adjust the setting according to the network you are using.  
Switch Setting  
Contents  
1
2
ON  
57.6k bps  
ON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 78  
26 Allen-Bradley PLC • 1  
SW6 (asynchronous link transmission speed)  
Set the same speed as POD.  
No  
1
Setting  
OFF  
ON  
Contents  
9600bps  
2
3
ON  
4
ON  
Diagnosis execution  
SW7 (network link selection)  
Switch Setting  
Contents  
1
2
ON  
Peer transmission link  
OFF  
SW8 (RS-232C/RS-422 selection)  
Switch Setting  
Contents  
1
2
OFF  
ON  
RS232C  
RS422  
ON  
OFF  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
SG  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DCD  
DTR 11  
SG 13  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26 Allen-Bradley PLC • 1  
2 - 79  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Female:  
FG  
1
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
SG  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DCD  
DTR 20  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Female:  
FG  
1
)
+
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
DCD  
4
5
6
8
-
SD  
+
RD  
-
RD  
TDA 14  
RDA 16  
RDB 18  
DTR 20  
TDB 25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 80  
27 Allen-Bradley PLC • 2  
Alle n-Bra d le y PLC • 2  
27  
(SLC500 se rie s • Mic ro Lo g ix1000)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Link Unit  
CPU (Processor module)  
RS-232C channel  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
SLC500  
SLC 5/03 or later models  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
1747-KE  
*
RS-232C program transfer  
cable made by Allen-Bradley  
Micro Logix 1000 Micro Logix 1000  
Port on a CPU  
+ RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 3]  
When using RS232C program transfer cable made by Allen-Bradley , connect the cable of  
[Wiring Diagram 3] to the D-sub 9 pin side of program transfer cable to communicate with POD .  
*
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
SLC500 series  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
0
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
0
Parity  
Even  
Even  
RS-232C  
RS-422  
Transmission  
Control Mode  
not supported on Channel 0  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
1
8
1
Transmission  
Code  
Protocol  
Full duplex (fixed)  
BCC (fixed)  
NO (fixed)  
Error Check  
Response  
Micro Logix 1000  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
9600bps  
0
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
0
Parity  
None (fixed)  
None  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8 (fixed)  
1 (fixed)  
8
1
Transmission  
Code  
CRC (fixed)  
Error Check  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27 Allen-Bradley PLC • 2  
2 - 81  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
N
B
(integer)  
(bit)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
TP (timer/current value)  
TA (timer/set value)  
CP (counter/current value)  
CA (counter/set value)  
I
(input)  
6
O
S
(output)  
(status)  
7
8
TC (timer/control)  
9
CC (counter/control)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
R
(control/control)  
R.LEN (control/data length)  
R.POS (control/data position)  
D
A
F
(BCD)  
(ASC II)  
(Float)  
ST (String)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Tran sm ission Param et er Set t in g  
CPU Port Channel 0  
Set up the parameters for CPU port channel 0, using the software specifically designed for this purpose.  
Baud Rate  
: 19200  
: ON  
Duplicate Detect  
ACK Timeout( 20 ms): 20  
Control Line  
Parity  
: NO HANDSHAKING  
: EVEN  
: BCC  
: 3  
Error Detect  
NAK Retries  
ENQ Retries  
: 3  
Embedded Responses : AUTO-DETECT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 82  
27 Allen-Bradley PLC • 2  
1747-KE  
Set up the parameters for 1747-KE, using the software specifically designed for this purpose.  
DF1 Port Setup Menu  
Baudrate  
: 19200  
: 8  
Bits Per Character  
Parity  
: Even  
: 1  
Stop Bits  
DF1 Full-Duplex Setup Parameters  
Duplicate Packet Detection  
Checksum  
: Enabled  
: BCC  
Constant Carrier Detect  
Message Timeout  
: Disabled  
: 400  
Hardware Handshaking  
: Disabled  
Embedded Response Detect : Auto Detect  
ACK Timeout( 5ms)  
ENQuiry Retries  
: 90  
: 3  
NAK Received Retries  
: 3  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
D-sub 9pin(Female:  
)
FG  
1
DCD  
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
COM  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27 Allen-Bradley PLC • 2  
2 - 83  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Female:  
FG  
1
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
COM  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 3  
PLC  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
CD  
RD  
SD  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
AB' RS-232C  
Ladder transfer  
cable  
Micro  
Logix  
1000  
RS  
GND  
DR  
RS  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
CS  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 4  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
)
-
7
12  
TXD  
1
2
5
6
9
+
-
SD  
SD  
RXD  
-
COM  
13  
+
+
RXD  
RD 24  
-
RD  
+
TXD  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 84  
28 GE Fanuc PLC • 1  
GE Fa nuc PLC • 1  
28  
(90 se rie s)  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Wiring Diagram  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
Programmable co-processor  
(PCM)  
90 Series  
Series 90-30  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
01 ("0" for x 10, "1" for x 1)  
1
Odd  
8
Parity  
Odd  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
Function  
Host link system (fixed)  
0 (fixed)  
Response Delay Time  
Time-out  
None (fixed)  
HEX (fixed)  
ASCII/HEX  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
(data register)  
(input)  
TYPE  
Remarks  
R
I
0
1
2
Q
(output)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28 GE Fanuc PLC • 1  
2 - 85  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
SD  
RD  
2
3
4
5
7
RS  
CS  
GND  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 8 5  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
)
7
12  
0V  
7
9
+
SD  
SD  
SD(A)  
-
RTS(A) 10  
CTS(A) 11  
RD(A) 13  
SD(B) 21  
RTS(B) 22  
CTS(B) 23  
13  
+
RD 24  
-
RD  
25  
120Ω  
RT  
24  
RD(B) 25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 86  
29 GE Fanuc PLC • 2  
GE Fa nuc PLC • 2  
29  
(90 se rie s SNP-X)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Series 90 micro  
90 Series  
(SNP-X)  
(CPU port)  
Series 90-30  
(CPU port)  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 1]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
Odd  
Odd  
8
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Function  
SNP-X (fixed)  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
R
I
(data register)  
(input)  
0
1
Q
M
G
AI  
(output)  
2
(internal relay)  
(global relay)  
(analog input)  
3
4
5
AQ (analog output)  
6
T
S
(temporary memory)  
(system status)  
7
8
Read only  
SA (system status)  
SB (system status)  
SC (system status)  
9
10  
11  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29 GE Fanuc PLC • 2  
2 - 87  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-4 8 5  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
)
7
12  
RTS(A)  
0V  
6
7
8
9
+
SD  
SD  
-
CTS(B')  
RT  
13  
+
RD 24  
-
RD  
25  
RD(A') 10  
RD(B') 11  
SD(A) 12  
SD(B) 13  
RTS(B) 14  
CTS(A') 15  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 88  
30 TOSHIBA PLC  
TOSHIBA PLC  
30  
(T se rie s)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
T Series  
T series  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 1]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows.  
For further information, refer to the TOSHIBA’s PLC manual.  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
01  
Odd  
8
1
Odd  
8
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Trasmission  
Code  
1
1
PLC Tran sm ission Param et er Set t in g  
For specifying parameters in the T series PLC, use a T-series programmer and enter the following data in the  
system information “7. COMPUTER LINK”.  
Station No.  
Baud rate  
Parity  
1
19200 BPS  
Odd  
Data bit  
Stop bit  
8 bit  
1 bit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30 TOSHIBA PLC  
2 - 89  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
X
Y
R
L
(data register)  
(input register)  
(output register)  
(auxiliary relay)  
(link relay)  
0
1
XW as word device  
YW as word device  
RW as word device  
LW as word device  
2
5
6
W
F
(link register)  
(file register)  
7
8
TN (timer/current value)  
CN (counter/current value)  
TS (timer/contact)  
9
Read only  
Read only  
Read only  
Read only  
10  
11  
12  
CS (counter/contact)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
7
)
2
3
4
5
7
RXA  
TXA  
+
SD 12  
-
13  
CTSA  
RTSA  
SG  
SD  
R
+
RD 24  
-
RD  
25  
10 RXB  
11 TXB  
12 CTSB  
13 RTSB  
R : 120Ω 1/2W  
*
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 90  
31 TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC  
TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC  
31  
(TC200)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Port on a CPU unit  
TC200  
TC200  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
TCCMW  
TCCMO  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows.  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
1
9600bps  
1
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
B
X
Y
R
G
H
L
(register 1)  
0
1
(register 2)  
(input relay)  
2
XW  
YW  
RW  
GW  
HW  
LW  
SW  
EW  
as word device  
as word device  
(output relay)  
5
(temporary storage)  
(extension temporary storage 1)  
(extension temporary storage 2)  
(latch)  
6
as word device  
as word device  
as word device  
as word device  
as word device  
as word device  
7
8
9
S
E
P
V
T
(shift register)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
(edge relay)  
(timer counter current value)  
(timer counter set value)  
(timer)  
TW  
CW  
AW  
as word device  
as word device  
as word device  
C
A
(counter)  
(special auxiliary relay)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31 TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC  
2 - 91  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Female:  
FG  
1
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
TXD  
RXD  
DTR  
GND  
DSR  
CTS  
RTS  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 92  
32 SIEMENS PLC • 1  
SIEMENS PLC • 1  
32  
(S5-90, S5-95U, S5-100U)  
Available PLC  
A similar program as RK512 is required.  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Select PLC Type  
S5-90U  
S5-95U  
S5-100U  
CP-521SI  
(3964R Transmission Protocol)  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
S5  
( S5 UG400 )  
1
*
[6ES5 734-1BD20] cable made by SIEMENS  
Second serial interface  
(3964R Transmission Protocol)  
S5-95U  
+ RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
1When using [6ES5 734-1BD20] cable made by SIEMENS , connect cable of [ Wiring Diagram 2 ]  
to the D-sub 25 pins side of [6ES5 734-1BD20] to communicate with POD .  
*
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Setting of PLC  
9600bps  
Even parity  
8
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
Busy Signal  
Hand Shake  
NO (fixed)  
OFF (fixed)  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
DB (data register)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Use memories more than DB3.  
I
(input relay)  
IW as word device  
QW as word device  
FW as word device  
Read only  
Read only  
Q
F
T
C
(output relay)  
Read only  
Read only  
(internal relay)  
(timer/current value)  
(counter/current value)  
Read only  
AS (absolute address)  
<E.g.> DB003000  
The assigned memory is indicated while editing  
the screen as illustrated:  
Address No.  
Block No.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32 SIEMENS PLC • 1  
2 - 93  
Notes on converting the data file of UG400 (or UG200) into the UGx20 data file.  
Wh en con vert in g t h e dat a file of UG4 0 0 (or UG2 0 0 ) in t o t h e UGx2 0 dat a file,  
t h e PLC t ype is au t om at ically select ed as “SIEMENS S5 UG4 0 0 .”  
In UG4 0 0 (or UG2 0 0 ) , t h e order of byt es in I (in pu t relay), Q (ou t pu t relay) an d  
F (in t ern al relay) is reversed.  
*
Exsample:  
S5 UG400  
Exsample:  
S5, S7  
F0000217  
F0000210  
F0000207  
F0000200  
F0000217  
F0000210  
F0000207  
F0000200  
Memory setting  
Memory setting  
of UG400 (or UG200)  
of UxG20  
FW20  
FW20  
15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Memories  
to be accessed  
to PLC by UGx20  
Memories to be accessed  
to PLC by UG400 (or UG200)  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
TXD  
RXD  
GND  
2
3
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
TXD  
RXD  
2
3
4
5
7
6ES5 734-1BD20  
S5-95U  
GND  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 94  
33 SIEMENS PLC • 2  
SIEMENS PLC • 2  
33  
(S5-115U/ 135U/ 155U , S7-300,400)  
Available PLC  
A similar program as RK512 is required.  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Wiring Diagram  
S5-115U  
S5-135U  
S5-155U  
S5  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
CP-524(3964R/RK512)  
CP-544(3964R/RK512)  
(S5 UG400)  
S7-300  
S7-400  
CP-341(3964R/RK512)  
CP-441(3964R/RK512)  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
S7  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Setting of PLC  
9600bps  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
Even (fixed)  
8 (fixed)  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1 (fixed)  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
DB (data register)  
0
Use memories, more than DB1 for S7,  
more than DB3 for S5.  
I
(input relay)  
1
2
3
IW as word device  
QW as word device  
FW as word device  
only in S5 series  
MW as word device  
only in S7 series  
Read only  
Read only  
Read only  
Read only  
Q
F
(output relay)  
(internal relay)  
M
(internal relay)  
3
Read only  
T
(timer/current value)  
4
5
6
C
(counter/current value)  
Read only  
AS (absolute address)  
Can not be used in S7 series.  
The assigned memory is indicated while  
editing the screen as illustrated:  
<E.g.> S5, S5 UG400  
DB003000  
S7  
DB003:0000  
Address No.  
Block No.  
Address No.  
Colon  
Block No.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33 SIEMENS PLC • 2  
2 - 95  
Notes on converting the data file of UG400 (or UG200) into the UGx20 data file.  
Wh en con vert in g t h e dat a file of UG4 0 0 (or UG2 0 0 ) in t o t h e UGx2 0 dat a file,  
t h e PLC t ype is au t om at ically select ed as “SIEMENS S5 UG4 0 0 .”  
In UG4 0 0 (or UG2 0 0 ) , t h e order of byt es in I (in pu t relay), Q (ou t pu t relay) an d  
F (in t ern al relay) is reversed.  
*
Exsample:  
Exsample:  
S5 UG400  
S5, S7  
F0000217  
F0000210  
F0000207  
F0000200  
F0000217  
F0000210  
F0000207  
F0000200  
Memory setting  
Memory setting  
of UG400 (or UG200)  
of UxG20  
FW20  
FW20  
15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Memories  
to be accessed  
to PLC by UGx20  
Memories to be accessed  
to PLC by UG400 (or UG200)  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
TXD  
RXD  
GND  
2
3
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Female:  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
RXD  
TXD  
GND  
2
3
5
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
7
)
T(A)  
R(A)  
SG  
2
4
+
SD 12  
-
SD  
13  
8
+
RD 24  
T(B)  
R(B)  
9
-
RD  
25  
11  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 96  
33 SIEMENS PLC • 3  
SIEMENS PLC • 3  
34  
(S5 PG Po rt)  
Con n ect ion  
Connect to the S5 series PG port. The communication parameter setting of POD is done automatically.  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Link Unit  
*
Programing port  
on a CPU unit  
[6ES5 734-1BD20] cable made by SIEMENS  
+RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
S5 PG Port  
S5 series  
When useing [6ES5 734-1BD20] cable made by SIEMENS , connect the cable of [ Wiring  
Diagram 1 ] to the D-sub 25 pin side of [6ES5 734-1BD20] to communicate with POD.  
*
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
DB (data register)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Use memories more than DB3.  
IW as word device  
QW as word device  
FW as word device  
I
(input relay)  
Q
F
T
C
(output relay)  
(internal relay)  
(timer/current value)  
(counter/current value)  
AS (absolute address)  
The assigned memory is indicated while editing the screen as illustrated:  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each  
PLC m odel.  
<E.g.> DB003000  
Address No.  
Block No.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
PC-Converter cable  
(6ES5 734-1BD20)  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
TXD  
RXD  
DTR  
GND  
CTS  
2
3
4
5
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35 SIEMENS PLC • 4  
2 - 97  
SIEMENS PLC • 4  
35  
(S7-200 PPI)  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
S7-200 series  
S7-200 PPI  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 1]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
Baud Rate  
Port  
9600bps  
2
9600bps  
2
Parity  
Even (fixed)  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
V
I
(data register)  
(input relay)  
0
1
VW as word device  
IW as word device  
Possible to write only to the area which is not used  
QW as word device  
Q
M
T
(output relay)  
2
(bit memory)  
3
MW as word device  
(timer/current value)  
(counter/current value)  
4
C
5
TB (timer/contact)  
6
Read only  
CB (counter/contact)  
7
Read only  
HC (high-speed counter/contact)  
AIW (analog input)  
8
Possible to use double word  
9
AQW(analog output)  
10  
11  
12  
SM (special memory/special relay)  
SMW as word device  
SW as word device  
S
(stage)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 98  
35 SIEMENS PLC • 4  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
7
)
SG  
5
TXD/RXD  
TXD/RXD  
3
8
+SD 12  
13  
+RD 24  
-RD 25  
-SD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Set t in g of Term in al Resist an ce  
Set the dip switch 7,8 of POD to OFF.  
Connect terminal registance to the POD serial connector (CN1) as follows.  
If terminal registance is not connected, the communication error may occur.  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
1
7
390Ω  
390Ω  
SG  
5V  
9
+
12  
SD  
-
SD 13  
RD 24  
RD 25  
220Ω  
+
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36 SIEMENS PLC • 5  
2 - 99  
SIEMENS PLC • 5  
36  
(TI545, 555)  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
TI500/505  
(TI500/505 UG400)  
TI545/555 CPU port  
(built-in)  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
Connect the cable to the CPU port (RS-232C built-in port) for TI545/555.  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
None (fixed)  
8 (fixed)  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1 (fixed)  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
V
(variable memory)  
0
WX (word input)  
WY (word output)  
1
2
X
Y
(discrete input)  
(discrete output)  
3
4
CR (control relay)  
5
TCP (timer counter/set value)  
TCC (timer counter/current value)  
DCP (drum count/set value)  
DCC (drum count/current value)  
DSP (drum step/set value)  
DSC (drum step/current value)  
6
7
8
1
*
9
Read only  
10  
11  
12  
13  
K
(fixed memory)  
STW (system state)  
<E.g.> DCP30000 : 1  
1
In case of using DCP (drum count/set value), set the  
drum step No.1 to 16.  
*
Drum step No.  
Colon  
Address No.  
The assigned memory is indicated while editing the  
screen as illustrated:  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 100  
36 SIEMENS PLC • 5  
Not es on con vert in g t h e dat a file of UG4 0 0 (or UG2 0 0 ) in t o t h e UGx2 0 dat a file.  
Wh en con vert in g t h e dat a file of UG4 0 0 (or UG2 0 0 ) in t o t h e UGx2 0 dat a file,  
t h e PLC t ype is au t om at ically select ed as “TI5 0 0 / 5 0 5 UG4 0 0 .”  
In UG4 0 0 (or UG2 0 0 ), t h e order of words is reversed wh en t h e dou ble words.  
In UG400/UG200  
MSB  
In UGx20  
MSB  
LSB  
High-order word  
1 word  
LSB  
Low-order word  
1 word  
Low-order word  
HIGH-order word  
2 words  
2 words  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
D-sub 9pin(Female:  
)
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
DCD  
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
7
)
GND  
6
5
8
1
7
+
+
SD 12  
DI  
-
SD  
13  
DI  
-
+
+
RD 24  
DO  
DO  
-
RD  
25  
-
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37 SIEMENS PLC • 6  
2 - 101  
SIEMENS PLC • 6  
37  
(S7-300/ 400MPI, S7-300/ 400MPI ADP)  
Available PLC  
Adapter  
MPI port  
Wiring Diagram  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
Select PLC Type  
CPU  
S7-300/400MPI  
S7-300/400 series  
SIEMENS HMI Adapter  
6ES7 972 0CA11-0XA0  
S7-300MPI  
(HMI ADP)  
S7-300/400 series  
(MPI port)  
S7-300MPI  
(PC ADP)  
SIEMENS PC Adapter  
6ES7 9720CA23-0XA0  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
S7-300MPI  
(Helmholz SSW7 ADP)  
Helmholz SSW7 Adapter  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
S7-300/400 MPI  
Item  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
19200bps (fixed)  
Even (fixed)  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8 (fixed)  
1 (fixed)  
2
Transmission  
Code  
Local No.(station no. of PLC)  
2
S7-300 MPI (HMI ADP / PC ADP / Helmholz SSW7 ADP )  
Item  
Setting of PLC  
38400bps  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
HMI ADP : 38400bps (fixed)  
PC ADP : 38400bps  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
None (fixed)  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8 (fixed)  
1 (fixed)  
Transmission  
Code  
Local No.  
(PLC station No.)  
2
2
Set the [MPI SETTING] in the [Comm. Parameter] in Panel editor.  
Item  
MPI setting  
Highest MPI Address  
Sorce No. (UG station No.)  
15/31/63/126  
0
Highest MPI Address : Specify the highest number on the network.  
Source No :  
Station number of POD. Make sure that this number is unique. Set difference number for [Source No.]  
and [Local No.], and make sure that [Source No.] ≤ [Node Cnt.]  
<E.g.> PLC is “13” and POD is “20”, select “31”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 102  
37 SIEMENS PLC • 6  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
DB (data register)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
Use memories more than DB1.  
IW as word device  
QW as word device  
MW as word device  
I
(input relay)  
Q
M
T
C
(output relay)  
(Merker Word)  
(timer/current value)  
(counter/current value)  
The assigned memory is indicated while editing the screen as illustrated:  
<E.g.> DB0001: 0000  
Address No.  
Block No.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
HMI Adapter  
PC Adapter  
D-sub 9pin(Female:  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
RD  
SD  
6
5
8
1
7
SG  
RTS  
CTS  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
+SD 12  
13  
+RD 24  
-RD 25  
+RD/SD  
-RD/SD  
3
8
-SD  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38 Shinko PLC  
2 - 103  
Shinko PLC  
38  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Select PLC Type  
SELMART-100 or later series Version O1M2-UCI-6x RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
SELMART  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
Even  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
7 (ASCII)  
1
7
1
Transmission  
Code  
Sum Check  
Provided (fixed)  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
(data register)  
0
On ly D regist er is available for t h is PLC m odel.  
No ot h er devices can be u sed alt h ou gh t h ey are available t o be set in t h eUG0 0 S-  
CW.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 104  
38 Shinko PLC  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39 SAMSUNG PLC  
2 - 105  
SAMSUNG PLC  
39  
(SPC se rie s)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422/485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
SPC  
Series  
SPC series  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Setting of PLC  
9600bps  
None  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
None  
1
Stop Bit  
1
Terminal Resistor  
ON for RS-485  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
(input/output)  
(link relay)  
TYPE  
Remarks  
R
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
M
K
F
(internal relay)  
(keep relay)  
(special relay)  
(data register)  
W
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 106  
39 SAMSUNG PLC  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
TXD  
RXD  
GND  
2
3
5
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
+
-
SD 12  
TR  
6
7
-
SD  
+
TR  
13  
24  
+
RD  
-
RD 25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40 KEYENCE PLC • 1  
2 - 107  
KEYENCE PLC • 1  
40  
(KZ se rie s link)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
Select PLC Type  
Port 1  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
Port 2  
KZ300  
KZ350  
KZ  
Series link  
KZ-L2  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
For further information, refer to the communication specifications of KEYENCE link unit.  
Item  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
0
Comm. Parameter of POD  
0
Baud Rate  
Parity  
19200bps  
Even  
19200bps  
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
7 (ASCII)  
2
7
2
Transmission  
Code  
Terminal Resistor  
ON for RS-422  
Set t h e port wit h t h e port set t in g swit ch , t h e t erm in at in g resist an ce wit h  
t erm in at or, an d t h e bau d rat e/ dat a bit / parit y/ st op bit wit h SET B dip swit ch es.  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
DM (data memory)  
CH (input/output relay)  
TYPE  
Remarks  
0
1
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 108  
40 KEYENCE PLC • 1  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
PLC  
SD  
RD  
SG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
7
PLC  
SDB  
SDA  
RDB  
RDA  
SG  
+
SD 12  
-SD  
13  
24  
25  
+
RD  
-RD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41 KEYENCE PLC • 2  
2 - 109  
KEYENCE PLC • 2  
41  
(KZ-A500)  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 able made by KEYENCE [ KZ-C20  
+ Cable made by Fuji [ UG200C-M ]  
KZ-A500  
CPU  
CPU Modular Port  
C
]
KZ-A500  
Port 1  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
Port 2  
MITSUBISHI  
A series link  
KZ-L10  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 4]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
CPU modular port of KZ-A500  
Item  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
0
Comm. Parameter of POD  
0
1
*
Baud Rate  
Parity  
9600bps  
9600bps  
Odd  
Odd  
8
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Terminal Resistor  
ON for RS-422  
1 In case of RS-422, the baud rate is fixed at 9600bps.  
*
Link Unit KZ-L10  
Item  
Setting of PLC  
0
Comm. Parameter of POD  
0
Port  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
19200bps  
19200bps  
Even  
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
7
7
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
Terminal Resistor  
ON for RS-422  
Set t h e port wit h t h e port set t in g swit ch , t h e t erm in at in g resist an ce wit h  
t erm in at or, an d t h e bau d rat e/ dat a bit / parit y/ st op bit wit h SET B dip swit ch es.  
For fu rt h er in form at ion , refer t o t h e com m u n icat ion specificat ion s of KZ-L1 0 .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 110  
41 KEYENCE PLC • 2  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
(data register)  
(link register)  
(file register)  
0
W
R
1
2
TN (timer/current value)  
CN (counter/current value)  
3
4
M
L
(internal relay)  
(latch relay)  
(link relay)  
6
7
B
X
Y
8
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
TS (timer/contact)  
TC (timer/coil)  
CS (counter/contact)  
CC (counter/coil)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
Modular Connector 6pin  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
CS  
SD  
SG  
RD  
RS  
1
3
4
5
6
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
123456  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41 KEYENCE PLC • 2  
2 - 111  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
DR  
SG  
CD  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
PLC  
SD  
RD  
SG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 4  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
7
PLC  
SDB  
SDA  
RDB  
RDA  
SG  
+
SD 12  
-SD  
13  
24  
25  
+
RD  
-RD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 112  
42 KEYENCE PLC • 3  
KEYENCE PLC • 3  
42  
(KV / KZ se rie s)  
Available PLC  
PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1] or  
Select PLC Type  
KZ-10/16/24/40/80/300/350  
(Program port direct connection)  
Cable made by KEYENCE [OP-26487]  
+Connector made by KEYENCE [OP-26485]  
Cable made by KEYENCE [KZ-C20]  
+Cable made by FUJI [ UG200C-M ]  
KZ/KV  
Series CPU  
KV Series  
RS-422  
(Program port direct connection)  
KZ-24/300  
(Program port direct connection)  
KZ 24/300  
CPU  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1] or  
Cable made by KEYENCE [OP-26487]  
+Connector made by KEYENCE [OP-26485]  
KZ 10/24  
CPU  
KZ-10/24  
(Program port direct connection)  
KV 700  
CPU  
KZ 700  
(Program port direct connection)  
When using RS232C cable made by KEYENCE [OP-26487] , attach the D-sub 25 pins connecter  
[OP-26485] to the modular jack on the POD side to communicate.  
*
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
KV series / KV 700 series CPU  
The communication parameter setting of POD is done automatically.  
KZ24/300 series CPU  
Item  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
0
Comm. Parameter of POD  
0
1
Baud Rate  
Parity  
38400bps  
38400bps  
*
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
Maximum baud rate is 38400 bps.If 57600bps or 115000bps is selected, POD communicates with a PLC forcibly at 9600 bps.  
*
*
*
KV10/24 series CPU  
Item  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
0
Comm. Parameter of POD  
0
1
Baud Rate  
Parity  
57600bps  
57600bps  
*
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
1
Transmission  
Code  
1
Maximum baud rate is 38400 bps.If 57600bps or 115000bps is selected, POD communicates with a PLC forcibly at 9600 bps.  
KV700 series CPU  
Item  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
0
Comm. Parameter of POD  
0
1
Baud Rate  
Parity  
9600bps  
9600bps  
*
Even  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
1
Transmission  
Code  
1 Maximum baud rate is 57600 bps.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42 KEYENCE PLC • 3  
2 - 113  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
DM (data memory)  
0
CH (input/output relay)  
TC (timer/current value)  
CC (counter/current value)  
TS (timer/set value)  
1
2
3
4
CS (counter/set value)  
5
T
(timer/contact)  
6
C
(counter/contact)  
7
TM (temporary data memory)  
CTH (*1)  
8
9
only in KV700  
only in KV700  
only in KV700  
only in KV700  
only in KV700  
CTC (*2)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
CT (*3)  
CR (control relay)  
CM (control relay)  
*1 high-speed counter / current value  
*2 high-speed counter comparator / set value  
*3 high-speed counter comparator / contact  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
Modular Connector 6pin  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
3
4
5
RD  
SG  
SD  
123456  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 114  
43 LG PLC  
LG PLC  
43  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Select PLC Type  
MASTER-K10/60/200  
K10/60/200  
K500/1000  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
MASTER-K500/1000  
RS-422  
[Wiring Diagram 6]  
MASTER-KxxxS  
MASTER-KxxxS CNET  
GLOFA CNET  
K200S/K300S/K1000S CPU port  
K4F-CUEA  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 4]  
RS-422  
[Wiring Diagram 7]  
G4L-CUEA  
GLOFA GM series CPU  
GM4/GM6/GM7 CPU port  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 5]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
MASTER-K10/60/200  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Setting of PLC  
9600bps (fixed)  
None (fixed)  
8 (fixed)  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1 (fixed)  
MASTER-K500/1000  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
1
*
19200bps  
None (fixed)  
8 (fixed)  
Data Length  
Transmission  
Code  
Stop Bit  
1 (fixed)  
1
In case of RS-422, the baud rate is fixed at 9600bps.  
*
MASTER-KxxxS  
Item  
Setting of PLC  
38400bps  
None (fixed)  
8 (fixed)  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
38400bps  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1 (fixed)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43 LG PLC  
2 - 115  
MASTER-KxxxS CNET / GLOFA CNET / GM series CPU  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
38400bps  
38400bps  
None  
None  
8
1
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
1
Transmission  
Code  
Available Mem ory  
MASTER-K10/60/200  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
M
P
K
(data register)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(auxiliary relay)  
(input/output relay)  
(keep relay)  
Input : Read only  
TC (timer/current value)  
CC (counter/current value)  
TS (timer/set value)  
CS (counter/set value)  
MASTER-K500/1000  
Memory  
(input/output)  
(relay)  
TYPE  
Remarks  
P
M
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Input : read only  
(link relay)  
K
F
(keep relay)  
(special relay)  
(timer/current value)  
(counter/set value)  
(data register)  
Read only  
T
C
D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 116  
43 LG PLC  
MASTER-KxxxS  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
P
M
L
(input/output)  
(relay)  
0
1
Input : read only  
(link relay)  
2
K
F
(keep relay)  
3
(special relay)  
(timer/current value)  
(counter/set value)  
(data register)  
4
Read only  
T
5
C
D
6
7
TC (time/cortact)  
9
CC (counter/contact)  
10  
MASTER-KxxxS CNET  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
P
(input/output)  
0
Input : read only  
PW as word device  
MW as word device  
LW as word device  
KW as word device  
Read only  
M
L
(relay)  
1
2
3
4
(link relay)  
(keep relay)  
(special relay)  
K
F
FW as word device  
T
(timer/current value)  
(counter/set value)  
(data register)  
5
C
D
6
7
TC (time/cortact)  
9
CC (counter/contact)  
10  
GLOFA CNET / GM series CPU  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
M
Q
I
(internal memory)  
(output)  
0
1
2
MW as word device  
QW as word device  
IW as word device  
(input)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43 LG PLC  
2 - 117  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
1
2
3
7
)
SD  
RD  
SG  
RXD  
TXD  
GND  
2
3
5
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
2
3
7
)
SD  
RD  
SG  
TXD  
RXD  
GND  
2
3
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
RxD  
TxD  
2
3
5
7
8
GND  
RTS  
CTS  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 4  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
)
FG  
1
2
3
4
CD  
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
5
7
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 118  
43 LG PLC  
Wirin g Diagram 5  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
1
2
3
7
)
SD  
RD  
SG  
RXD  
SG  
4
5
7
TXD  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 6  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
+
+
SD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
SD  
10  
11  
-
-
SD  
SD  
+
RD  
-
RD  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 7  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
PLC  
7
SG  
RDA  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44 FANUC PLC  
2 - 119  
FANUC PLC  
44  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Port of CPU unit (JD14)  
of Power Mate-Model H/D  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
Power Mate  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
Power Mate i Model H/D  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Signal  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps (fixed)  
RS-422 (fixed)  
0 (fixed)  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
Parity  
Even (fixed)  
8 (fixed)  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1 (fixed)  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
X
Y
R
K
T
(data register)  
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
(internal relay)  
(keep relay)  
(timer)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
WX as word data  
WY as word data  
WR as word data  
WK as word data  
C
(counter)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 120  
44 FANUC PLC  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
PLC  
JD42  
1
FG  
1
*
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
RDB  
SDB 17  
0V 18  
9
Use twist shielded cables.  
Half pitch 20 pins.  
*
*
1
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
JD14  
1
*
FG  
SG  
1
7
RDB  
1
2
3
4
+SD 12  
RDA  
SDB  
SDA  
0V  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
13  
24  
25  
11  
JD15  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
*
1
Half pitch 20Pin  
RDB  
RDA  
1
2
R
R : 120Ω 1/2W  
*
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
PLC  
JD40 *  
1
FG  
1
SG  
7
RXD  
1
2
+
SD 12  
RXD  
TXD  
*
13  
RD 24  
RD 25  
3
-
SD  
+
TXD  
4
*
-
RTS  
RTS  
5
6
*
CTS  
7
CTS  
0V  
8
*
12  
Use twist shielded cables.  
1 Half pitch 20Pin  
*
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45 FATEK PLC  
2 - 121  
FATEK AUTOMATION PLC  
45  
(FACON FB se rie s)  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Link Unit  
CPU Port  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
[Wiring Diagram 2]  
FACON  
FB series  
FACON FB series  
RS-422  
[Wiring Diagram 3]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Signal  
Setting of PLC  
9600bps  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
RS-232C  
RS-232C  
Even (fixed)  
7 (fixed)  
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1 (fixed)  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
HR (data register)  
DR (data register)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
X
Y
M
S
T
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
(internal relay)  
(step relay)  
(timer/contact)  
(counter/contact)  
Read only  
Read only  
C
RT (timer/current value)  
RC (counter/current value)  
DRC (counter 32bits/current value)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 122  
45 FATEK PLC  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
RXD1  
TXD1  
RTS1  
CTS1  
GND  
1
2
3
4
6
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
RXD1  
TXD1  
RTS1  
CTS1  
GND  
2
3
4
5
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
7
PLC  
+
D
+
-
D
SD 12  
-
+
-
SD  
RD 24  
RD  
13  
SG  
25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46 IDEC PLC  
2 - 123  
IDEC PLC  
46  
Available PLC  
Selet PLC Type  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
RS-232C Cable made by IDEC [FC2A-KC1]  
or  
MICRO3  
MICRO3  
* Cable made by IDEC [FC2A-KC2]  
+RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C * Cable made by IDEC [FC2A-KC4C]  
+RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
MICRO Smart  
MICRO Smart  
When using RS-232C cable made by IDEC [FC2A-KC2] or [FC2A-KC4C], connect the cable of  
*
[Wiring Diagram 1] to the D-dub 9 pins side of [FC2A-KC2] or [FC2A-KC4C] to communicate with POD .  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
9600bps  
1
Even  
7
1
Even  
7
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
I
(data register)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
(input relay)  
Q
M
R
(output relay)  
(internal relay)  
(shift register)  
TS (timer/set value)  
TN (timer/elapsed value)  
T
(timer/contact)  
Read only  
Read only  
CS (timer/set value)  
CN (counter/elapsed value)  
C
(counter/contact)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 124  
46 IDEC PLC  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
CD  
SD  
RD  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
ER  
GND  
DR  
RS  
Use twist shielded cables.  
CS  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47 MODICON PLC  
2 - 125  
MODICON PLC  
47  
Available PLC  
PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
Modbus RTU  
Modbus RTU  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
9600bps  
1
Even  
8
1
Even  
8
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
4
3
0
1
(word device)  
0
1
4
6
(input register)  
(output coil)  
(input relay)  
Read only  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin (Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
RX  
TX  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DTR  
GND  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 126  
48 YAMATAKE PLC  
YAMATAKE PLC  
48  
Available PLC  
PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
Select PLC Type  
MX Series  
MX200/MX50  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
9600bps  
1
Even  
8
1
Even  
8
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
R
M
L
(data register)  
0
(auxiliary relay)  
(latch relay)  
1
2
X
Y
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
3
4
TP (timer/current value)  
TS (timer/set value)  
5
6
CP (counte/current value)  
CS (counter/set value)  
7
8
T
C
P
(timer/contact)  
(counter/contact)  
(link register)  
9
10  
11  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48 YAMATAKE PLC  
2 - 127  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 128  
49 TAIAN PLC  
TAIAN PLC  
49  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PORT  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-422 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
Communication Port (T/R+, T/R-)  
MMI Port (9pin) (4-5 Short Computer Link Mode)  
TP02  
TP02  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
1
None  
7
1
None  
7
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
V
(data register/timer counter/contact)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
•
(imer counter/contact)  
•
WS (system register)  
WC (constant register)  
X
Y
C
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
(internal relay)  
SC (special register)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49 TAIAN PLC  
2 - 129  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
7
PLC  
+
T/R  
+
SD  
12  
T/R-  
-SD 13  
+
SHLD  
RD 24  
-RD 25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin (Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin (Male:  
FG  
SG  
1
)
+
7
RX  
2
3
4
5
7
8
+
+
TX  
SD  
12  
PG/COM  
GND  
-SD 13  
+
RD 24  
-RD 25  
RX  
TX  
-
-
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 130  
50 SAIA PLC  
SAIA PLC  
50  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Communication module  
PGU port  
PCD7.F120  
PCD4.F110  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 3]  
PCD  
PCD1  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
0
8
1
0
8
1
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
code  
S-BUS Con figu rat ion  
S-BUS Mode  
Parity  
0 (PGU port), 1 (PCD7.F120, PCD4.F110)  
PGU Port Number  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
R
(Register Word)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rfp (Float)  
T
C
I
(Timer-Counter Word)  
(Timer-Counter Coil)  
(Input Bit)  
read only  
O
F
(Output Bit)  
(Flag Bit)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50 SAIA PLC  
2 - 131  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
PGU port  
FG  
SD  
1
2
RX  
2
3
5
TX  
RD  
SG  
3
7
GND  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
PCD7.F120  
FG  
SD  
1
2
TX  
11  
RX 12  
RD  
SG  
3
7
GND  
10  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
RS-4 8 5  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
SG  
1
7
PCD7.F110  
10  
12  
11  
GND  
T/R+  
T/R-  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
12  
13  
24  
25  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 132  
51 MOELLER PLC  
MOELLER PLC  
51  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
PS4  
PS4-201-MM1(PRG port)  
+
ZB4-303-KB1 Cable made by MOELLER  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and V6 is as follows:  
Item  
Setting of PLC  
9600bps  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
Baud Rate  
Port  
1
1
Parity  
None  
None  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
1
8
1
Transmission  
code  
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
M
(Marker)  
0
MW as word device  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
SD  
1
2
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
TX  
RX  
SG  
2
3
5
RD  
SG  
3
7
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52 Telemecanique PLC  
2 - 133  
Te le m e c a niq ue PLC  
52  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
TSX Micro  
TSX Micro  
RS-485  
[Wiring Diagram 1]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Setting of PLC  
9600bps  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
Baud Rate  
Connection  
Parity  
9600bps  
Multi-Link (fixed)  
Odd  
8 (fixed)  
1
Odd  
8
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
MW (memory Word)  
KW (constant word)  
0
1
2
M
(bit memory)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-4 8 5  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
MiniDIN 9pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
0V  
D+  
D-  
7
1
2
SG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
7
12  
13  
24  
25  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 134  
53 Automationdirect PLC  
Auto m a tio nd ire c t PLC  
53  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
D4-430  
Link Unit  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
D4-440  
Port 1 on a CPU unit  
RS-422  
[Wiring Diagram 5]  
D4-450  
Port 3 on a CPU unit  
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
RS-485  
[Wiring Diagram 6]  
Direct LOGIC  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
D2-240  
D2-250  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 3]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
D4-430  
D4-440  
Port 1 on a CPU unit  
RS-422  
[Wiring Diagram 5]  
Port 0 on a CPU unit  
Port 3 on a CPU unit  
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 4]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 6]  
D4-450  
Direct LOGIC  
(K-Sequence)  
Port 1 on a CPU unit  
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 2]  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 3]  
D2-240  
D2-250  
Port 1 on a CPU unit  
Port 2 on a CPU unit  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
19200bps  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
"0" for x10, "1" for x1  
Odd  
1
Odd  
8
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
8
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Host link system (fixed)  
Function  
0 (fixed)  
Response Delay Time  
Time-out  
None (fixed)  
HEX (fixed)  
ASCII/HEX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53 Automationdirect PLC  
2 - 135  
Available Mem ory  
Direct LOGIC, Direct LOGIC(K-Sequence)  
Memory  
(data register)  
(input relay)  
(output relay)  
(internal relay)  
(stage)  
TYPE  
Remarks  
V
X
Y
C
S
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GX (global inputs)  
GY (global outputs)  
T
(timer/contact)  
CT (counter/contact)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
Modular Connector 6pin  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
7
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
SG  
RxD  
TxD  
1
3
4
654321  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 136  
53 Automationdirect PLC  
Wirin g Diagram 3  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
)
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
0V  
2
3
4
5
7
* Use twist shielded cables.  
*1 High density D-sub 15pin  
Wirin g Diagram 4  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 15pin(Male:  
FG  
1
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
TXD  
RXD  
0V  
2
3
13  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
RS-4 2 2  
Wirin g Diagram 5  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
SG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
7
SG  
7
9
12  
13  
24  
25  
RXD+  
RXD-  
10  
CTS1+ 11  
TXD1+ 14  
TXD1- 16  
RTS1+ 18  
RTS1- 19  
CTS1+ 23  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Wirin g Diagram 6  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
SG  
+SD  
-SD  
+RD  
-RD  
7
SG  
7
12  
13  
24  
25  
TXD3+ 12  
TXD3- 13  
RXD3+ 24  
RXD3- 25  
In case SU-6M, it is possible  
to use terminal blocks.  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54 VIGOR PLC  
2 - 137  
VIGOR PLC  
54  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
M series  
M1-CPU1  
COM PORT  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
19200bps  
19200bps  
0
Even  
7
0
Even  
7
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
X
Y
M
S
T
(data register/special register)  
(input relay)  
0
1
(output relay)  
2
(internal relay/special relay)  
(internal relay/step relay)  
(timer/current value)  
(counter/current value)  
3
4
5
C
6
32C (high-speed counter/current value)  
TS (timer/contact)  
7
*1  
8
CS (counter/contact)  
TC (timer/coil)  
9
10  
11  
CC (counter/coil)  
*1 In case of the items which can display double word data (e.g. data display, graph, sampling), the  
data is managed as double word data.  
Both bit data and word data are managed as lower-half 16 bits data.  
Input : 16 upper-half bits are ignored.  
Output : “0” is written in the 16 upper-half bits.  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 138  
54 VIGOR PLC  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SD  
RD  
SG  
1
2
3
7
RXD  
2
3
5
7
8
TXD  
SG  
RTS  
CTS  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
RS-4 8 5  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
7
SG  
+SD  
-SD  
12  
13  
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
+RD 24  
-RD 25  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55 DELTA PLC  
2 - 139  
DELTA PLC  
55  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
DVP series  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
DVP series  
RS-485 Communication port  
RS-485  
[Wiring Diagram 1]  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
9600bps  
1
Even  
7
1
Even  
7
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
D
X
Y
M
S
T
(data register)  
(input relay)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(output relay)  
(auxiliary relay)  
(timer)  
C
(counter)  
32C (high-speed counter)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 140  
55 DELTA PLC  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-4 8 5  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
FG  
+SD  
-SD  
1
12  
13  
+
-
+RD 24  
-RD 25  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56 BALDOR PLC  
2 - 141  
BALDOR PLC  
56  
Available PLC  
Select PLC Type  
Wiring Diagram  
Controller  
NextMove (Comms Data Array)  
Optimum (Comms Data Array)  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
Mint  
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Baud Rate  
Port  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
9600bps  
9600bps  
0
None  
8
0
None  
8
Parity  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
Transmission  
Code  
1
1
Available Mem ory  
Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
I
(Integer)  
0
1
2
F
B
(Float)  
(Integer omitting decimals)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 142  
56 BALDOR PLC  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Female:  
FG  
SD  
RD  
SG  
1
2
3
7
)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
SG  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
* Use twist shielded cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57 TOYO DENKI PLC  
2 - 143  
TOYO DENKI PLC  
57  
(uGPC sx se rie s)  
Available PLC  
Wiring Diagram  
PLC  
Link Unit  
NP1L-RS1  
Select PLC Type  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
uGPCsx  
Series  
uGPCsx Series  
RS-232C [Wiring Diagram 1]  
RS-485 [Wiring Diagram 2]  
UG00C-S  
NP1L-RS2  
NP1L-RS4  
uGPCsx CPU  
Only one unit of POD can be connected to one link unit, except for “Multi-link 2” connection.  
*
Com m u n icat ion Set t in g  
The recommended communication parameter setting of both PLC and POD is as follows:  
Item  
Setting of PLC  
Comm. Parameter of POD  
38400bps (fixed)  
Baud Rate  
RS-232C  
RS-422  
RS-232C  
RS-422  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Transmission  
Control Mode  
Parity  
Even (fixed)  
8 (fixed)  
Data Length  
Stop Bit  
1 (fixed)  
No function block (FB) settings are required on the PLC.  
*
Available Mem ory  
Standard Memory  
TYPE  
Remarks  
I
(input memory)  
-
O
M
(output memory)  
(standard memory)  
-
2
4
8
RM (retain memory)  
SM (system memory)  
Set t h e m em ory t o t h e ext en t of t h e m em ory ran ge of each PLC m odel.  
Use TYPE n u m ber t o assign in direct m em ory for m acro program s.  
To set an in direct m em ory u sin g a m acro, specify t h e CPU No. u sin g t h e ext en ded code.  
In direct m em ory set t in g by m acro is n ot available for in pu t (I) or ou t pu t (Q) m em ory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 - 144  
57 TOYO DENKI PLC  
Wirin g  
The following is a diagram to show the wiring of the cable which connects POD to PLC.  
RS-2 3 2 C  
Wirin g Diagram 1  
POD (CN1)  
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Male:  
FG  
1
)
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
SG  
2
3
4
5
7
RD  
SD  
ER  
SG  
DR  
RS  
CS  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
RS-4 8 5  
Wirin g Diagram 2  
PLC  
D-sub 9pin(Female:  
)
POD (CN1)  
(+)  
SDA  
2
1
4
3
9
8
6
D-sub 25pin(Male:  
)
FG  
SG  
1
(-)  
SDB  
(+)  
SDA  
SDB  
RDA  
RDB  
7
12  
(-)  
+
SD  
SD  
RD  
(+)  
-
13  
(-)  
+
24  
-
FG  
RD 25  
Use twist shielded cables.  
*
When signals are easily influenced by noise, attach a ferrite core (TDK ZCAT2032-0930 is  
recommended) to both the ends of the cable.  
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling of  
Peripheral  
Equipment  
1. Co nne c ting the UG00P-U1  
2. Co nne c ting the UG00P-U2  
3. Co nne c ting the Me m o ry Ca rd Re c o rd e r  
4. Co nne c ting the Me m o ry Exte nsio n Unit  
5. Co nne c ting Co m m unic a tio n Inte rfa c e  
6. Co nne c ting Dua l Po rt Inte rfa c e  
7. Ho w to Re p la c e the Ba c klig ht Unit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Connecting the UG00P-U1  
3 - 1  
Co nne c ting the UG00P-U1  
1
The I/O unit (UG00P-U1) is attached to the rear side of the UG520/420. It uses 16 pins for input and 16 pins  
for output to support external I/O of a PLC or another unit. Note that UG00P-U1 does not support UG320/  
221/220, and UG00P-U1 cannot be used with the UG00P-U2 simultaneously.  
For assignment in the memory or how to use UG00P-U1, refer to the User's Manual <Function> (FEH376).  
Warning  
Turn OFF the power before mounting, dismounting, wiring, maintaining, or checking, otherwise, electric  
•
shock, erratic operation, or troubles might occur.  
Caution  
The extension I/O unit uses a link. Thus, do not use the unit in places where high-speed operation,  
•
urgent operation, or dangerous operation (emergency stop) may be performed.  
Ext ern al Dim en sion s  
125.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Connecting the UG00P-U1  
3 - 2  
Mou n t in g t h e I/ O Un it  
Remove the seal for preventing dust attached on the back of  
Screw for fixing a unit  
(three points)  
•
the POD as shown in the figure on the right. Mount the  
extension I/O unit, then secure it using the three screws.  
Expansion I/O unit  
Set the DI/DO connector (attached to the package) to the  
•
extension I/O unit connector, then secure it using the two  
L
100-  
240VAC  
N
NC  
screws.  
Tightening the screws for securing a unit  
The following table shows the screw to be used and tightening  
torque:  
CN1  
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN2  
Screw type  
Screw size  
Tightening torque  
(N•m)  
POD  
Screw for securing  
a unit  
M3  
0.3 to 0.5  
COM  
24V DC  
1
2
3
4
5
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
6
OUT Load  
OUT Load  
OUT Load  
OUT Load  
OUT Load  
COM  
7
8
9
1
12  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
22  
34  
13  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
24V DC  
23  
DI/DO connector (included in the package)  
OUT Load  
OUT Load  
OUT Load  
OUT Load  
OUT Load  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
Input  
0
1
2
2
3
4
5
3
7
8
4
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
IN NO.  
6
25  
Pin No. 23 13  
24 14  
15  
26 16 28  
5
27 17  
6
OUT Load  
OUT  
Output  
OUT Load  
OUT Load  
0
1
2
7
3
4
5
8
7
8
9
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
OUT NO.  
6
OUT Load  
Load  
20  
Pin No. 18 29  
19 30  
31  
21 32 10 22 33 11 34  
OUT Load  
I/ O Circu it  
The following figures show the circuit diagrams for the I/O pins:  
Input circuit  
Output circuit  
•
•
Input voltage  
: NPN type with off-voltage contact,  
12 V to 24 V DC  
Maximum drive current : 50 mA (12V to 24V DC)  
Residual current : 1.7V  
Input impedance : 3.3KΩ  
Input current : 3 to 7 mA  
OUT0  
12 to 24V DC  
COM  
Load  
+
1.5kΩ  
3.3kΩ  
-
22Ω  
OUT15  
IN0  
Load  
+
-
COM  
IN15  
12V to 24V DC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Connecting the UG00P-U2  
3 - 3  
Co nne c ting the UG00P-U2  
2
The UG00P-U2 (serial connection I/O unit) is connected with the UG520/420/320/221/220. It uses 16 input  
points and 16 output points for connection to an external device such as a PLC. Note that the UG00P-U2  
cannot be used with the UG00P-U1 simultaneously.  
Warning  
Turn OFF the power before mounting, dismounting, wiring, maintaining, or checking, otherwise, electric  
•
shock, erratic operation, or troubles might occur.  
Caution  
The serial connection I/O unit uses a link. Therefore, do not use the unit in places where high-speed  
•
operations, urgent operations, or dangerous operations (emergency stop-type) are performed.  
Ext ern al Dim en sion s  
188  
180  
158  
MJ1  
IN1  
IN5  
IN9  
IN11  
IN13  
IN15  
OUT1 OUT3 OUT5 OUT7 OUT8 OUT10 OUT12 OUT14 COM2  
24V DC  
IN3  
IN7  
FG  
INO  
IN2  
IN4  
IN6  
IN8  
IN10  
IN12  
IN14 COM OUT0 OUT2 OUT4 OUT6 COM1 OUT9 OUT11 OUT13 OUT15  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
A9  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Connecting the UG00P-U2  
3 - 4  
Specificat ion s  
Item  
Specifications  
Rated voltage  
24V DC  
±10%  
Power supply  
Consumption current  
Inrush current  
60 mA max.  
1.5 A (200 µs) max.  
Operating temperature  
Storage temperature  
Operating humidity  
Dust  
0 to +50 deg.C  
-10 to +60 deg.C  
Physical  
environmental  
conditions  
20 to 85%; No condensation.  
Conductive dust.  
Corrosive gus  
No corrosive gases.  
Vibration resistance  
Vibration frequency: 10 to 150 Hz, Acceleration: 14.7 m/s2 ,  
Directions: X, Y, and Z. (Vibration was applied in each direction for  
one hour.)  
Mechanical  
service  
conditions  
Shock resistance  
Pulse wave: Half sine waves, Peak acceleration: 147 m/s2 ,  
Directions: X, Y, and Z. (Shock was applied in each direction twice.)  
Noise voltage: 1,500V, Pulse width: 1 µs, Rising time: 1 ns.  
Between power supply and FG terminal: 500V AC, 1 minute  
500V DC, 10 MΩ or more  
Resistance to noise  
Withstand voltage  
Isolation resistance  
Ground  
Electrical  
service  
conditions  
Type II grounding  
Cooling method  
External dimensions  
Natural air-cooling  
Mounting  
conditions  
182 (188) 90 36  
(W  
H
D (mm))  
Mounting dimensions  
(W H (mm))  
Case color  
158 83  
Munsell 5Y3/0.5 (dark gray). The bottom plate is not colored.  
Others  
Case material  
Mass  
Steel plate  
500g  
Mou n t in g t h e serial expan sion I/ O u n it  
Cable contained  
in the package.  
Connect the cable  
with MJ1 or MJ2.  
L
Mount the serial extension I/O unit, then secure  
100-  
240V AC  
N
NC  
•
it using the four screws as shown in the figure on  
the right.  
Fasten screws in  
these two places.  
CN1  
Connect MJ1 on the serial expansion I/O unit  
MJ2  
MJ1  
•
DC  
24  
V
CN2  
IN1  
FG  
I
N3  
IN5  
IN  
M
J1  
IN0  
IN7  
IN  
IN2  
I
IN  
9
I
N
N4  
1
1
I
N
6
1
3
with MJ1 (MJ2) at the bottom of the POD using  
8
IN  
1
5
IN1  
0
I
N1  
2
O
UT  
1
IN1  
O
UT  
4
C
3
OM  
O
+
UT5  
OU  
O
UT  
T0  
OU  
7
O
UT  
T2  
OU  
8
O
UT  
T4  
10  
OU  
O
UT  
T6  
12  
CO  
O
UT  
M1  
14  
OU  
C
OM  
T9  
OU  
2
T1  
1
OU  
T13  
OU  
T15  
the cable contained in the package.  
POD  
Fasten screws in Serial expansion  
these two places.  
I/O unit  
Tightening the terminal screws on the terminal base  
The following table shows the screw to be used and tightening torque:  
Place  
Screw size  
Tightening torque (N•m)  
Crimp terminal (unit: mm)  
Screw for I/O  
terminal terbase  
minal  
6.2 Max.  
6.2 Max.  
M3  
0.3 to 0.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Connecting the UG00P-U2  
3 - 5  
I/ O Circu it s  
The following figures show the I/O terminal circuit diagrams:  
Input circuit  
Input points  
Common point  
Input type  
: 16  
12 to 24V DC  
COM+  
IN0  
: 1  
+
: Off-voltage contact,  
NPN type  
1kΩ  
-
Input voltage  
Voltage at ON  
Voltage at OFF  
: 12V to 24V DC  
: 9.6 to 30V  
: 0 to 3.6V  
3.3kΩ  
Maximum allowable : 30V DC  
voltage  
1kΩ  
Allowable ripple ratio : 5% or less  
IN15  
Insulation type  
: Insulation using  
photocoupler  
: 3 KΩ  
3.3kΩ  
Input impedance  
Input current  
: 5 to 7 mA  
Output circuit  
OUT0  
Output points  
Common points  
Output type  
: 16  
Load  
22Ω  
: 2 (8-points groups)  
: Output with transistor sink  
: 12V to 24V DC  
: 50 mA  
Rated voltage  
Maximum loaded  
current  
OUT7  
Load  
+
22Ω  
-
COM1  
OUT8  
12 to 24V DC  
Output delay  
: Off to On : 1 ms or less  
: On to Off : 1 ms or less  
: 1.7V  
Load  
22Ω  
22Ω  
Residual voltage  
Leak current when : Up to 0.1 mA  
turned off  
OUT15  
COM2  
Load  
+
Insulation type  
: Insulation using photocoupler  
-
12 to 24V DC  
Term in al base wirin g  
The figure below shows the serial expansion I/O unit terminal base configuration.  
Refer to the figure below when connecting the lines.  
Lo  
ad  
Lo  
ad  
Lo  
ad  
Lo  
ad  
24V DC  
Lo  
ad  
24V DC  
Lo  
ad  
Lo  
ad  
Lo  
ad  
+
IN1  
IN3  
IN5  
IN7  
IN9  
IN11  
IN13  
IN15  
OUT1  
OUT3  
OUT5  
OUT7  
OUT8  
OUT10 OUT12 OUT14  
-
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20  
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20  
OUT0  
IN0  
IN2  
IN4  
IN6  
IN8  
IN10  
IN12  
IN14  
OUT2  
OUT4  
OUT6  
OUT9  
OUT11 OUT13 OUT15  
FG  
COM+  
Lo  
ad  
Lo  
ad  
Lo  
ad  
Lo  
ad  
12 to  
24V DC  
Lo  
ad  
Lo  
ad  
Lo  
ad  
Lo  
ad  
24V DC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Connecting the Memory Card Recorder  
3 - 6  
Co nne c ting the Me m o ry Ca rd Re c o rd e r  
3
The memory card recorder (UG00P-MR) is connected with the UG520/420/320/221/220. The memory card  
recorder supports “screen data transmission” and an “external storage device (functions for data logging and  
memory manager)” for the memory card.  
For the UG400/210 Series, use the UG200P-MR or UG400P-MR.  
*
Warning  
Turn OFF the power before mounting, dismounting, wiring, maintaining, or checking, otherwise, electric  
•
shock, erratic operation, or troubles might occur.  
Caution  
Do not bundle the control line communication cable with the power cables or route it close to the power  
•
cables. Route the control line communication cable 200 mm or more apart from the power cables.  
Otherwise, the recorder may incorrectly operate due to noise.  
Ext ern al Dim en sion s  
UG00P-MR, body  
94.0  
25.0  
UG00P-MR, attachment cover  
Cover panel  
142.0  
4.0  
103 +-10  
126.0  
16.5 27.5  
+0  
-1  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Connecting the Memory Card Recorder  
3 - 7  
Assem blin g t h e Recorder  
1
Cut the cover panel (maximum thickness: 5 mm) so that the attachment cover can be set, then insert the  
attachment cover into the cover panel.  
Screw  
1
*
Cover panel (side)  
Attachment cover  
1 : Use M3-size screws.  
*
Cover panel (side)  
Attachment cover  
Screw  
Screw  
2
Secure the attachment cover to the cover panel using the screws.  
UG00P-MR, body  
Cover panel (side)  
Attachment cover  
55.5mm  
3
Insert the UG00P-MR into the attachment cover, then secure it using four screws.  
Cover panel (side)  
See the table below for how to tighten  
the screw for fixing a unit:  
•
Attachment cover  
Screw type  
Screw size  
Tightening  
torque(N•m)  
Screw for securing  
a unit  
M3  
0.3 to 0.5  
Screw  
Secure the body by  
screwing every side.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Connecting the Memory Card Recorder  
3 - 8  
Con n ect in g t h e Mem ory Card Recorder wit h t h e POD  
Con n ect in g t h e UG0 0 P-MR wit h t h e POD  
“Screen data transmission” and an “external storage  
L
100-  
240VAC  
N
device (functions for data logging and memory manager)”  
NC  
Connect the cable  
to MJ1 or MJ2.  
can be used when connecting the UG00P-MR with the  
POD.  
1
N
C
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN2  
Connect the UG00P-MR with the POD as shown in the  
figure on the right.  
The UG00P-MR  
AC adapter is  
not required.  
Cable contained  
in the package  
Memory card  
Ext ern al St orage Device (dat a loggin g an d m em ory m an ager)  
To use MJ2 (MJ1) for an external storage device, specify [Memory Card] for [Modular Jack 2] ([Modular  
Jack 1]) at [Modular] in [System Settings] on the editor.  
•
•
To use data logging or memory manager with modular jack 1, set DIP SW6 to ON (termination resistor:  
Enabled) at the back of the POD.  
Tran sferrin g Screen Dat a bet ween t h e UG0 0 P-MR an d POD  
To use MJ1 to transfer screen data, specify either [Editor Port], [Memory Card], or [Barcode] for the  
•
[Modular Jack 1] setting on the editor.  
To use MJ2, specify [Modular Jack 2] for [Memory Card]. MJ2 takes priority, and data transmission from  
MJ1 is prohibited.  
For how to transfer POD screen data to the memory card or how to transfer screen data recorded in the  
memory card to the POD, see Section 1, “17. POD Operation.”  
•
Con n ect in g t h e Mem ory Card Recorder wit h PC  
To write screen data to or read screen data from the  
UG00P-MR using a personal computer, or to read/  
write data using memory manager or data logging,  
connect the UG00P-MR with the PC as shown on the  
right.  
Connect the  
UG00P-MR AC  
adapter.  
AC adapter  
Memory card  
Connect the cable  
to COM1 or COM2.  
PC  
disc  
UG00C-T  
RESET  
Before reading/writing screen data, be sure to start up UG00S-CW (screen development software) on the  
PC. For the procedure, refer to the User's Manual <Operation> (FEH375).  
•
•
Before reading/writing data using memory manager or data logging, be sure to start up UG00P-MSE. For  
the details of UG00P-MSE, refer to the User's Manual <Memory Card Editor> (FEH359).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Connecting the Memory Extension Unit  
3 - 9  
Connecting the Memory Extension Unit  
4
The following types of memory expansion unit are prepared:  
Type  
Type of object POD  
UG520H/UG420H/UG320H  
UG221H  
Capacity  
4M byte  
Battery  
Use  
UG00P-D4  
UG221P-D4  
UG00P-SR  
UG221P-SR  
Expand the screen data  
memory  
Unnecessary  
UG520H/UG420H/UG320H  
UG221H  
512K bytes  
(Data part)  
Calendar function  
SRAM backup function  
Necessary  
UG220 cannot be used.  
*
Warning  
Turn OFF the power before mounting, dismounting, wiring, maintaining, or checking, otherwise, electric  
shock, erratic operation, or troubles might occur.  
•
•
•
Do not connect in reverse polarity, charge (except rechargeable ones), disassemble, heat, throw in fire or  
short-circuit the batteries, otherwise, they might burst or take fire.  
If batteries have any deformation, spilled fluids, or other abnormality, do not use them. The use of such  
batteries might cause explosion or firing.  
Caution  
Follow the directions of the operating instructions and the manual when mounting the product. If  
mounting is improper, the product might drop or develop problems or erratic operations.  
•
Con n ect in g t h e Mem ory Ext en sion Un it  
1. Turn off the power.  
2. Remove the cover indicated in the figure below, then set the memory extension unit.  
3. Turn on the power.  
Firmly press the edges of the memory extension unit to mount it securely  
*
FRO
4
0
0
2
0
1
1
P
M
N
C
C
O
R
M
F
1
-M  
7
P
9
V
1
Remove the cover.  
2
L
Set the memory extension unit.  
100-  
240VAC  
N
NC  
CN1  
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN2  
UG, body  
For a Memory expansion 2:  
ON  
DIP SW  
Turn on DIP SW NO.1  
by pushing it up.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Connecting the Memory Extension Unit  
3 - 10  
How t o Use t h e UGxxP-D4  
The extension memory can be used for the two ways:  
1
Memory expansion 1  
The memory size increases as listed in the table below ( 1).  
*
2
Memory expansion 2  
Turn on DIP SW NO.1 at the back of the UG body (extension mode).  
Write data other than programs for the UG (fonts, interface drivers, or screen data) into the extension  
memory.  
The table below shows the sizes of screen data ( 2).  
*
Be sure to turn off the power to the UG then turn it on again after turning on DIP SW NO.1.  
*
The UG screen data size changes depending on the font used, as shown in the table below.  
UG  
Memory Expansion 1 Memory Expansion 2  
Standard  
1
2
*
+4M  
4M  
*
7,232 (5,248)  
6,848 (4,800)  
7,488 (5,440)  
7,360 (5,312)  
7,232 (5,248)  
7,360 (5,376)  
Font  
Japanese  
3,200 (1,216)  
2,816 ( 768)  
3,456 (1,408)  
3,328 (1,280)  
3,200 (1,216)  
3,328 (1,344)  
3,712 (3,712)  
3
*
Japanese 32  
3,200 (3,264)  
3,840 (3,904)  
3,712 (3,776)  
3,712 (3,712)  
3,840 (3,840)  
English (Western Europe)  
Chinese (traditional)  
Chinese (simplifide)  
Korean  
1 The screen data size when the expansion memory is used and DIP SW NO.1 is turned off (standard).  
2 The screen data size when the expansion memory is used and DIP SW NO.1 is turned on.  
3 Japanese 32 supports 32-dot fonts. When the magnification coefficient for characters is an even number, a 32-dot font is  
used as the base, thus the characters are smoothly displayed.  
*
*
*
Setting from the editor is also necessary.  
With the UG screen development software (UG00S-CW), set items in the [Memory Expansion] dialog box on  
the [Unit Setting] window under [System Setting].  
How t o Use t h e UGxxP-SR  
The following functions are available when the SRAM cassette is installed:  
Calendar function  
Calendar can be displayed even when the PLC is connected that has no calendar function.  
SRAM backup function  
The following data can be backed up:  
Backup of sampling data (data logging function)  
•
As external memory for PLC (memory manager function)  
•
Backup of the internal memory used for macros  
•
Saving of memo pad data  
•
The setting is made from the [Main Menu] screen of the POD main unit or from the editor. For  
details regarding the [Main Menu] screen, refer to Section 1; for details regarding the setting on  
the editor, refer to the User's Manual <Function> (FEH376).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Connecting the Memory Extension Unit  
3 - 11  
Abou t t h e Bat t ery for UGxxP-SR  
To set the battery in the SRAM cassette, use the following procedure:  
1. With the “+” (plus) side of the battery faced up, set the battery in the socket of the SRAM cassette.  
To set the battery, insert the battery first in the “+” (plus) side of the  
SANYO  
+
CR2430  
SRAM cassette, and then insert it also in the “-” (minus) side while  
T
pushing toward the “+” side.  
Type :UG00P-SR  
Lot No :XXXXXXX  
2. Write the date (year, month, day) 5 years from today in the “Next date to  
replace battery” field on the attached “Caution” seal, and stick the seal  
on the cassette, according to the following figure:  
O  
+
“+” (plus) side  
+
R2430  
Type :UG00P-SR  
Lot No :XXXXXXX  
See operating or maintenance  
instruction for type of  
SANYO  
battery to be used.  
+
-
+
+
CR2430  
T
Battery replacement.  
(Caution seal)  
Write the date 5 years from today.  
The life of the battery for the SRAM cassette is approximately 5 years at 25°C. When the  
battery voltage drops, 4th bit of address $s167 in the POD internal memory turns ON to prompt  
*
you to replace the battery. In such case, replace the battery as early as possible.  
MSB  
LSB  
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00  
$s167  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0: Uninstalled  
1: Expansion memory (2M)  
2: Expansion memory (4M)  
3: SRAM + Clock cassette  
Reserved for  
memory cassette  
data (set to 0 (zero))  
Reserved for memory cassette data  
(set to 0 (zero))  
1: Battery abnormal (needs to be replaced)  
Precau t ion s for Usin g t h e UGxxP-SR  
About battery replacement  
Before replacing the battery, be sure to make backup files of the data stored in the UGxxP-SR from the  
screen development editor. For the backing up procedure, refer to the User's Manual <Operation>  
(FEH375).  
Adapted version  
To use the UGxxP-SR, the versions of the POD main unit and the screen development editor must be the  
following:  
POD main unit and program version: 1.200 or newerFont data version: 1.100/1.090/1.000 or newer  
Screen development editor (UG00S-CW): 2.4.0.0 or newer  
About the replacement battery  
The following replacement battery is prepared:  
Name  
Type  
Remarks  
Replacement battery for UG00P-SR, UG221P-SR UG00P-BT  
Coin type lithium primary battery  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Connecting Communication Interface  
3 - 12  
Connecting Communica tion Interfa ce  
5
The optional communication I/F unit is installed on the rear of the POD main unit to construct individual  
network. UG520/420/320/221 uses UG03I - x ; UG220 uses UG02I - x .  
•
Network Name  
T-Link  
I/F Type  
UG03I-T  
UG02I-T  
Refer to the Manual  
T-Link Communications  
(FEH356)  
(FEH358)  
(FEH357)  
UG03I-J  
UG02I-J  
OPCN-1  
SX-BUS  
OPCN-1 Communications  
SX-BUS Communications  
UG03I-S  
UG02I-S  
Ethernet  
CC-Link  
UG03I-E (2)  
UG03I-C  
Ethernet Communications  
CC-Link Communications  
FL-NET Commnications  
(FEH366)  
(FEH355)  
(FEH367)  
FL-NET  
UG03I-E (2)  
UG03I-P  
PROFIBUS  
PROFIBUS Communications (FEH368)  
Warning  
Turn OFF the power before mounting, dismounting, wiring, maintaining, or checking, otherwise, electric  
shock, erratic operation, or troubles might occur.  
•
Caution  
Follow the directions of the operating instructions and the manual when mounting the product. If  
mounting is improper, the product might drop or develop problems or erratic operations.  
•
Ext ern al Dim en sion s  
UG03I-x  
UG02I-x  
102.5  
28.5  
S T N  
T1 T2 SD  
10  
1
A
B
SG  
H
L
13.6  
25  
14.9  
37.8  
98  
The dimensions are the same for all UG03I-x.  
The dimensions are the same for all UG02I-x.  
*
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Connecting Communication Interface  
3 - 13  
Ext ern al Dim en sion s of t h e I/ F Un it on t h e POD  
UG520  
UG420  
312  
288  
I/F unit  
I/F unit  
11.5  
8
114.5  
110  
141.5  
126  
334  
220  
310  
UG320  
UG221  
I/F unit  
I/F unit  
85  
85  
SYSTEM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
POWER  
182.5  
230  
UG220  
173.6  
I/F unit  
50  
45  
28.5  
5
182.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Connecting Communication Interface  
3 - 14  
Mou n t in g t h e I/ F u n it (UG0 3 I-x)  
Remove the seal for preventing dust attached on the back of the POD as shown in the figure on the right.  
•
Mount the I/F unit, then secure it using the 3 screws.  
Route the communication cable. For details regarding how to lay and connect the communication cable,  
•
refer to the corresponding user’s manual.  
For the UG320/UG221, set the spacer contained in the package to the hole on the upper left side, then  
•
mount the I/F unit.  
I/F unit  
Mounting screws (3 positions)  
*
L
100-  
240VAC  
N
NC  
1
N
C
MJ2  
MJ1  
CN2  
Tightening screws for fixing a unit  
*
See the table below for how to tighten the screw for fixing a unit:  
POD  
Type of screw  
Screw size  
Tightening torque (N•m)  
Unit mounting screw  
M3  
0.3 to 0.5  
Mou n t in g t h e I/ F u n it (UG0 2 I-x)  
I/F unit  
Route the insulated cable through the  
•
notch.  
Remove the seal for preventing dust  
•
attached on the back of the POD as shown  
Notch  
in the figure on the right.  
Mount the I/F  
unit, then secure it using the 4 screws.  
Connect the insulated cable with  
the ground terminal on the POD.  
I/F unit  
•
•
Mounting screws  
(4 positions)  
Route the communication cable.  
For details regarding how to lay  
and connect the communication  
cable, refer to the corresponding  
user’s manual.  
*
+
(
)
DC24V  
(
-
)
CN1  
CN2  
MJ2  
MJ1  
POD  
Tightening screws for fixing a unit  
*
See the table below for how to tighten the screw for fixing a unit:  
Type of screw  
Screw size  
Tightening torque (N•m)  
0.3 to 0.5  
Unit mounting screw  
M3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Connecting the Dual Port Interface  
3 - 15  
Co nne c ting the Dua l Po rt Inte rfa c e  
6
The UG00P-DI unit makes the connector for programmer of MELSEC-A, QnA or FX series CPU of  
Mitsubishi PLC into “two-port type”.  
•
It is used to connect POD and PLC loader at the same time for debugging PLC program or to connect two  
units of POD using the connector for programmer of the CPU of the PLC.  
Warning  
Turn OFF the power before mounting, dismounting, wiring, maintaining, or checking, otherwise, electric  
shock, erratic operation, or troubles might occur.  
•
Caution  
Follow the directions of the operating instructions and the manual when mounting the product. If  
mounting is improper, the product might drop or develop problems or erratic operations.  
•
Ext ern al Dim en sion s  
4.1  
100  
24.1 8.08  
UG00P-DI  
1 2 3  
UG  
Device mounting screw  
1
12.7  
Type seal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Connecting the Dual Port Interface  
3 - 16  
How t o in st all UG0 0 P-DI  
To connect the UG00P-DI to A series PLC of small type (A1S, A2US, etc.), it is necessary to mount the  
bracket that is supplied with the UG00P-DI.  
MELSEC Axsxxx  
MELSEC AxS CPU  
MELSEC Axsxxx  
MELSEC AxS CPU  
STOP  
STOP  
Surely tighten the  
screw after mounting  
the bracket.  
RUN L.CLR  
RUN  
RUN L.CLR  
RUN  
POWER  
POWER  
ERROR RESET  
RESET  
ERROR RESET  
RESET  
MITSUBISHI  
MITSUBISHI  
MITSUBISHI  
MITSUBISHI  
Fit the bracket  
according to the  
figure at right.  
[Dimensions of  
the bracket]  
(Unit: mm)  
UG00P-DI  
UG00P-DI  
Surely tighten  
the screws.  
6.5 16.3  
1 2 3  
UG  
1 2 3  
UG  
Not used  
(Used to connect to A or  
QnA series of large type)  
How t o Use UG0 0 P-DI  
1) To use for debugging  
Connect to POD or GPP (personal computer, A6GPP, etc.)  
Connector for GPP  
(can be used to connect  
POD)  
Mitsubishi A/QnA/FX series  
CPU  
Enlarged view  
UUG00P-DI  
GG  
00  
00  
PP  
--  
GPP  
DD  
II  
1
2
3
When connecting to A series or QnA series CPU,  
insert the connector provided on the rear  
directly to the CPU port, or use UG200C-G  
(sold separately).  
U
G
Personal computer, A6GPP, A7PHP, etc.  
Connector for  
CPU port  
Sliding switch  
Used to select the model of  
connected device.  
1. A series (ACPU port)  
2. QnA series (QnACPU port)  
3. FX series  
When connecting to FX1/2 series CPU, use  
UG200C-G (sold separately).  
Connector  
for POD  
P
UG00P-DI  
P
G
When connecting to FX0N/2N series CPU, use the  
conversion cable (FX-20P-CADP) supplied  
from Mitsubishi.  
1
2
3
G
D
Note:  
Be sure to turn the power off  
when changing over of the  
sliding switch.  
UG200C-G (sold separately).  
UG200C-M  
POD  
UG520/420/320/221/220  
UG400/210  
2) To use for connecting two units of POD  
PODs can be connected on the GPP side as well as on the UG side (see the above figure).  
For this, the cable used on the GPP side must be the same as that used on the UG side (UG200C-M).  
Precau t ion s for Use  
1. Be careful of the capacity of the 5V power supply of the CPU because the UG00P-DI is supplied power  
from the CPU (current consumption: max. 350 mA).  
2. The wiring length between the CPU and the UG00P-DI shall be as short as possible (max. 1 to 1.5 m).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Connecting the Dual Port Interface  
3 - 17  
3. Attention shall be paid to noise problems when wiring the devices.  
4. Note that there are the following restrictions when connecting between UG00P-DI and QnA series CPU  
port.  
1) Concerning communication time-out, select one of the following two methods:  
Set [Continue] for [Communication error treatment] in the [Detail] menu under [Comm. Parameter.]  
•
under [System Setting].  
Set such that [Time-out time] [Retry count] becomes 20 seconds or more.  
•
2) Running-write operation  
If the required time is 20 seconds or more when running-write operation is instructed from the GPP  
side, the UG00P-DI cannot be used. In such case, perform the writing after stopping the PLC.  
The number of steps of the program that permits running-write operation within 20 seconds differs  
with the content of said program. The following calculation provides a guideline:  
Time = (Number of steps ÷ 60) Scan time (ms)  
This calculation provides only a guideline. This method is not applicable when constant scan is  
performed.  
3) If the power is turned on with the console connected to the UG00P-DI, communication time-out  
error occurs on the console before the initialization of UG00P-DI is completed.  
In such case, disconnect once the cable from the console and then reconnect it, or reset the console,  
and the console will be restored to normal condition.  
(The UG00P-DI starts normal operation 15 seconds after the power is turned on.)  
5. When connecting the UG00P-DI to A or FX series CPU, set 1.5 seconds or greater value for [Time-out  
time] on the [Comm. Parameterˇ] dialog for the POD.  
6. When using the UG00P-DI by directly connecting it to KZ-A500 CPU port of Keyence PLC, if program is  
written with the ladder software supplied from Keyence (Ladder Builder for KZ-A), time out occurs due to  
too slow response of the PLC, which may cause error to occur on the ladder software side. In such case,  
you can solve this problem by disconnecting the UG00P-DI and connecting the cable directly to the CPU  
port to write program.  
7. UG00P-DI program can be upgraded (version up) with the transfer utility “U2DI.exe” that is included in  
UG00S-CW.  
Version Up of UG0 0 P-DI  
It is possible to upgrade (version up) the system program for UG00P-DI from the editor (UG00S-CW).  
Con n ect in g t h e person al com pu t er t o t h e UG0 0 P-DI  
1. Connect the UG00P-DI to the RS-422 connector of Mitsubishi A/QnA/FX series CPU.  
2. Connect between the personal computer and the UG00P-DI (GPP port) using the RS232C/422 conver-  
sion cable (UG00C-X from Fuji Electric Co.,  
Personal computer  
Ltd.)  
disc  
3. Turn on the power switch of the PLC, and  
Mitsubishi A/QnA/FX series  
power is supplied to the UG00P-DI.  
RS232C/422  
conversion  
cable  
RESET  
CPU  
Sliding switch (for selecting the model  
of connected device)  
1. A series (ACPU port)  
2. QnA series (QnACPU port)  
3. FX series  
P
U
G
P
G
0
0
P
-
D
I
1
2
3
Note:  
G
D
Be sure to turn the power off when  
changing over the sliding switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Connecting the Dual Port Interface  
3 - 18  
How t o u se t h e UG0 0 P-DI t ran sfer u t ilit y  
1. Start “U2DI.exe”  
Double-click the [U2DI.exe] icon, and the [UG00P-DI  
transfer utility] dialog box will be displayed.  
1
2. Select a port.  
2
3
1
Select, in box  
, a port to be used.  
4
3. UG00P-DI information  
Click the [UG00P-DI information] button to confirm the  
program version and connectable model of UG00P-DI. (See the  
figure at right.)  
4. Select a program to be transferred.  
The path to the UG00P-DI program file that is to be transferred is  
4
displayed in text box  
.
As default, “the folder in which UG00S-CW is installed as explained  
above”/Tpa (folder)/dpprg.DI is displayed in this example.  
To select other program file for transfer, click the [Reference] button. Then the [Select program file] dialog  
box is displayed. In this dialog, set the program that you want to transfer.  
5. Transfer the program file.  
Turn on again the power switch of the PLC and click the [Transfer] button, and the program will begin to  
be transferred. When no program is selected for transfer, the [Select program file] dialog box is displayed.  
In this dialog, select a program that you want to transfer.  
2
Comments related to communication condition are displayed in text box  
: “Connecting to UG00P-DI” or  
“Transferring data”, for example.  
3
A bar is displayed in box  
while the program is being transferred, and the message “Transfer com-  
pleted” is displayed when transfer ended successfully. To cancel the program transfer in the middle, click  
the [Cancel] button.  
If [UG0 0 P-DI in form at ion ] or [Tran sfer] in st ru ct ion is execu t ed aft er click in g  
t h e [UG0 0 P-DI in form at ion ] or [Tran sfer] bu t t on an d com m u n icat in g wit h  
UG0 0 P-DI, t h e m essage “Receivin g wait in g t im e over” is displayed. Tu rn t h e  
power swit ch of t h e PLC on again an d re-execu t e t h e in st ru ct ion .  
*
Precau t ion s  
Do not interrupt the communication by disconnecting and reconnecting the cable while the program is  
•
being transferred. If interrupted, normal communication becomes impossible.  
In such case, turn the power switch of the PLC on again and re-execute the instruction.  
The UG00P-DI transfer utility is adapted to Ver. 2.4.0.0 or newer UG00S-CW.  
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 19  
Ho w to Re p la c e the Ba c klig ht Unit  
7
When the screen brightness becomes dim and cannot be adjusted to the optimum setting, the life of the  
backlight unit may be expiring.  
For the UGx20 series PODs, it is possible for users to replace the back light, except UG221. Obtain a new  
backlight unit suitable for the POD type, and replace the backlight unit with the new one according to the  
procedure described below.  
Body type  
Backlight  
unit type  
Replacement  
procedure  
Life of backlight  
UG520H-V (TFT color)  
UG520P-BFA  
UG420P-BVA  
UG420P-BFA  
UG420P-BC  
UG320P-BC  
3-20  
3-34  
3-34  
3-40  
3-45  
50,000  
50,000  
50,000  
25,000  
40,000  
UG420H-V (TFT color, 800 600 dots)  
UG420H-T (TFT color, 640 480 dots)  
UG420H-S (STN color)  
UG320H-S (STN color)  
UG320HD-S (STN color)  
UG220H-S (STN color)  
UG220P-BCA  
3-52  
3-52  
40,000  
40,000  
50,000  
UG220H-L (Monochrome)  
UG221H (All Types)  
UG220P-BLA  
Can not be replace  
Figures for the life of backlight shows the time till the surface luminance becomes 50% the initial value at  
*
the ambient temperature of 25°C.  
Warning  
Turn off the power before replacement. You may get an electric shock, or the body or backlight unit may  
malfunction or become faulty.  
•
•
The liquid of the LCD (liquid crystal) is toxic. If the LCD panel is damaged and the liquid flows out  
of the panel, make certain that no liquid enters your mouth. If the liquid contacts your skin or clothes,  
wash it off using soap or detergent.  
Do not remove any parts other than those indicated in the manual. Otherwise, the body or unit may  
become faulty.  
•
Caution  
Replace the unit in an environment free from dust, foreign matter, or static electricity. Otherwise, the  
body or unit may malfunction or become faulty.  
•
Lightly wipe dust or liquids off the surface of the body or unit using a soft cloth.  
•
Do not push the front of the display unit using a sharp pointed device such as tweezers and engineering  
tools.  
•
Do not touch any parts other than those necessary (especially for the printed circuit boards). Otherwise,  
the body or unit may malfunction or become faulty.  
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 20  
UG520H-V  
UG520H-V Backlight Unit Replacement  
(Required Tool)  
Screwdriver  
Precision screwdriver  
Do n ot t ou ch cables an d boards t h at are n ot associat ed wit h back ligh t  
u n it replacem en t . Doin g so m ay resu lt in failu re.  
Wh en replacin g t h e back ligh t , t ak e appropriat e preven t ive m easu res  
again st st at ic elect ricit y.  
*
The point of measures against static electricity is to keep the entire workplace including humans at  
the same electric potential. Use an anti-static wristband or mat to prevent static electricity.  
1. Turn the POD over and remove the packing.  
2. Remove the 6 screws from the rear external case.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
Rear external case  
Screws  
Packing  
3. Remove the rear external case.  
4. Disconnect the backlight unit (CFL unit) connector.  
Hold t h e con n ect or an d pu ll it ou t . Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable  
t h en .  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) connector  
Inside case  
Ribbon cables  
Front external case  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 21  
5. Remove the two ribbon cables.  
Slide t h e lock wit h t h e ribbon cable h oldin g down wit h you r fin gers.  
* The connector is not removable.  
Lock  
Ribbon cable connector  
Ribbon cable connector  
Lock  
Ribbon cable  
Ribbon cable  
Slide the lock to release it.  
6. Remove cord band and remove the LCD module connector by pulling it up.  
Hold t h e con n ect or an d pu ll it ou t . Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable  
t h en .  
Screws  
Cord band  
Inside case  
Screws  
Front external case  
LCD module connector  
7. Remove the 8 screws fixing the inside case.  
8. Remove the inside case from the front external case.  
Tak e care n ot leave scrat ch es, fin gerprin t s, or dirt on t h e display pan el.  
9. Place the inside case with the display panel side up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 22  
10. Remove the 4 screws fixing the LCD module.  
11. Remove the LCD module from the inside case.  
Screws  
LCD module  
Inside case  
12. Place the LCD module with the display panel side down.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
13. Partly remove the cushioning material.  
*
The cushioning material is cemented with an adhesive. Remove only the portion on the backlight unit  
(CFL unit) cover.  
14. Remove the screw fixing the backlight unit (CFL unit) cover.  
Since the screw is small, use a precision screwdriver to remove it.  
*
15. Use a precision screwdriver, slide the cover in the direction of arrow (1), and remove the cover from the  
claws while pulling it up in a slanting direction (as shown with the arrow (2)).  
Cover  
Cover fixing screw  
(1)  
Cushioning material  
(2)  
LCD module (rear)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 23  
16. Remove the backlight unit (CFL unit) by pulling it up.  
Cover  
Backlight unit (CFL unit)  
LCD module (rear)  
17. Attach a new backlight unit (CFL unit).  
Wh en t ak in g a n ew back ligh t u n it ou t of t h e bag, do n ot t wist or yan k on  
t h e cable.  
18. Attach the cover.  
*
Insert the cover in a slanting direction (as shown with arrow (1)), and slide it to the direction of arrow (2)  
until it is hooked on claws.  
19. Attach the screw fixing the cover.  
Since the screw is small, use a precision screwdriver to attach it.  
*
(1)  
Cover  
Cover fixing screw  
(2)  
LCD module (rear)  
Claws  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 24  
20. Place the LCD module with the display panel side up.  
21. Attach the LCD module to the inside case.  
*
Insert the cable and two ribbon cables into the inside case.  
Ribbon cables  
Inside case  
LCD module cable  
Inside case  
Ribbon cables  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) cable  
LCD module  
22. Attach the 4 screws to fix the LCD module.  
Screws  
LCD module  
Inside case  
23. After attaching the LCD module to the inside case, place it with the display panel side down.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
24. Attach the inside case to the front external case.  
Do n ot allow t h e en t ry of du st or part icles t o t h e area bet ween t h e in side  
case an d t h e fron t ext ern al case.  
25. Attach the 8 screws.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 25  
26. Attach the 2 ribbon cables.  
*
Pass one ribbon cable under the ribbon cable guide.  
27. Attach the backlight unit (CFL unit) connector.  
Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable of t h e back ligh t u n it .  
CPU board connector  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) connector  
Ferrite core  
Cord band  
Inside case  
Ribbon cables  
LCD module connector  
* Pass this under the guide.  
Lock  
Guide  
Ribbon cable  
Ribbon cable connector  
Ribbon cable connector  
Lock  
Ribbon cable  
Insert the ribbon cable into the connector and slide the lock to set it.  
28. Attach the LCD module connector.  
*
Secure the ferrite core using a cord band.  
Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable of t h e LCD m odu le.  
Visu ally ch eck t h at all con n ect ors an d ribbon cables are con n ect ed se-  
cu rely.  
29. Attach the rear external case to the front external case.  
*
Fit the rear external case in position. Press the case entirely so as to fit the panel board connector  
with the CPU board connector inside.  
30. Attach the external 6 screws.  
31. Attach the packing.  
Rear external case  
Packing  
Screws  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 26  
UG420H-V  
UG420H-V Backlight Unit Replacement  
(Required Tool)  
Screwdriver  
Do n ot t ou ch cables an d boards t h at are n ot associat ed wit h back ligh t  
u n it replacem en t . Doin g so m ay resu lt in failu re.  
Wh en replacin g t h e back ligh t , t ak e appropriat e preven t ive m easu res  
again st st at ic elect ricit y.  
*
The point of measures against static electricity is to keep the entire workplace including humans at  
the same electric potential. Use an anti-static wristband or mat to prevent static electricity.  
1. Turn the POD over and remove the packing.  
2. Remove the 6 screws from the rear external case.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
Rear external case  
Screws  
Packing  
3. Remove the rear external case.  
4. Disconnect the backlight unit (CFL unit) connector.  
Hold t h e con n ect or an d pu ll it ou t . Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable  
t h en .  
Ribbon cables  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) connector  
Inside case  
Front external case  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 27  
5. Remove the two ribbon cables.  
Slide t h e lock wit h t h e ribbon cable h oldin g down wit h you r fin gers.  
* The connector is not removable.  
Lock  
Ribbon cable connector  
Ribbon cable connector  
Lock  
Ribbon cable  
Ribbon cable  
Slide the lock to release it.  
6. Remove the 6 screws fixing the inside case.  
Screws  
Inside case  
Front external case  
Screws  
7. Remove the inside case from the front external case.  
Tak e care n ot leave scrat ch es, fin gerprin t s, or dirt on t h e display pan el.  
8. Place the inside case with the display panel side up.  
9. Remove the 4 screws fixing the LCD module.  
Screws  
LCD module  
Inside case  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 28  
10. Open the LCD module by turning it to the left and remove it from the inside case. Place it with the  
display panel side down.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
Inside case  
LCD module (rear)  
11. Hold down the claw, and pull the backlight unit (CFL unit) out horizontally to the left.  
Backlight unit (CFL unit)  
Claw  
12. Attach a new backlight unit (CFL unit).  
*
Hold down the claw, and insert the backlight unit (CFL unit) horizontally to the right.  
Wh en t ak in g a n ew back ligh t u n it ou t of t h e bag, do n ot t wist or yan k on  
t h e cable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 29  
13. Close the LCD module by turning it to the right, and attach the LCD module to the inside case.  
*
Insert the cable and two ribbon cables into the inside case.  
Ribbon cables  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) cable  
LCD module  
14. Attach the 4 screws to fix the LCD module.  
Be careful not to drop the fiber cable.  
*
Screws  
Fiber cable  
Inside case  
15. After attaching the LCD module to the inside case, place it with the display panel side down.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
16. Attach the inside case to the front external case.  
Do n ot allow t h e en t ry of du st or part icles t o t h e area bet ween t h e in side  
case an d t h e fron t ext ern al case.  
17. Attach the 6 screws.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 30  
18. Attach the 2 ribbon cables.  
19. Attach the backlight unit (CFL unit) connector.  
Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable of t h e back ligh t u n it .  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) connector  
CPU board connector  
Ribbon cables  
Inside case  
Front external case  
Ribbon cable connector  
Lock  
Ribbon cable  
Lock  
Ribbon cable connector  
Ribbon cable  
Insert the ribbon cable into the connector and slide the lock to set it.  
Visu ally ch eck t h at all con n ect ors an d ribbon cables are con n ect ed se-  
cu rely.  
20. Attach the rear external case to the front external case.  
*
Fit the rear external case in position. Press the case entirely so as to fit the panel board connector  
with the CPU board connector inside.  
21. Attach the external 6 screws.  
22. Attach the packing.  
Rear external case  
Packing  
Screws  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 31  
UG420H-T  
UG420H-T Backlight Unit Replacement  
(Required Tool)  
Screwdriver  
Do n ot t ou ch cables an d boards t h at are n ot associat ed wit h back ligh t  
u n it replacem en t . Doin g so m ay resu lt in failu re.  
Wh en replacin g t h e back ligh t , t ak e appropriat e preven t ive m easu res  
again st st at ic elect ricit y.  
*
The point of measures against static electricity is to keep the entire workplace including humans at  
the same electric potential. Use an anti-static wristband or mat to prevent static electricity.  
1. Turn the POD over and remove the packing.  
2. Remove the 6 screws from the rear external case.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
Rear external case  
Screws  
Packing  
3. Remove the rear external case.  
4. Disconnect the backlight unit (CFL unit) connector.  
Hold t h e con n ect or an d pu ll it ou t . Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable  
t h en .  
Ribbon cables  
Inside case  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) connector  
Front external case  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 32  
5. Remove the two ribbon cables.  
Slide t h e lock wit h t h e ribbon cable h oldin g down wit h you r fin gers.  
*
The connector is not removable.  
Lock  
Ribbon cable connector  
Ribbon cable connector  
Lock  
Ribbon cable  
Ribbon cable  
Slide the lock to release it.  
6. Remove the 6 screws fixing the inside case.  
Screws  
Inside case  
Screws  
Front external case  
7. Remove the inside case from the front external case.  
Tak e care n ot leave scrat ch es, fin gerprin t s, or dirt on t h e display pan el.  
8. Place the inside case with the display panel side up.  
9. Remove the 4 screws fixing the LCD module.  
Screws  
LCD module  
Inside case  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 33  
10. Open the LCD module by turning it to the left and remove it from the inside case. Place it with the  
display panel side down.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
Inside case  
LCD module (rear)  
11. Hold down the claw, and pull the backlight unit (CFL unit) out horizontally to the left.  
Backlight unit (CFL unit)  
Claw  
12. Attach a new backlight unit (CFL unit).  
*
Hold down the claw, and insert the backlight unit (CFL unit) horizontally to the right.  
Wh en t ak in g a n ew back ligh t u n it ou t of t h e bag, do n ot t wist or yan k on  
t h e cable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 34  
13. Close the LCD module by turning it to the right, and attach the LCD module to the inside case.  
*
Insert the cable and two ribbon cables into the inside case.  
Ribbon cables  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) cable  
LCD module  
14. Attach the 4 screws to fix the LCD module.  
*
*
When attaching the screw, tighten the grounding terminal together.  
Be careful not to drop the fiber cable.  
Grounding terminal  
Screws  
Inside case  
Fiber cable  
15. After attaching the LCD module to the inside case, place it with the display panel side down.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
16. Attach the inside case to the front external case.  
Do n ot allow t h e en t ry of du st or part icles t o t h e area bet ween t h e in side  
case an d t h e fron t ext ern al case.  
17. Attach the 6 screws.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 35  
18. Attach the 2 ribbon cables.  
19. Attach the backlight unit (CFL unit) connector.  
Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable of t h e back ligh t u n it .  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) connector  
Ribbon cables  
CPU board connector  
Inside case  
Front external case  
Ribbon cable connector  
Lock  
Ribbon cable  
Lock  
Ribbon cable connector  
Ribbon cable  
Insert the ribbon cable into the connector and slide the lock to set it.  
Visu ally ch eck t h at all con n ect ors an d ribbon cables are con n ect ed se-  
cu rely.  
20. Attach the rear external case to the front external case.  
*
Fit the rear external case in position. Press the case entirely so as to fit the panel board connector  
with the CPU board connector inside.  
21. Attach the external 6 screws.  
22. Attach the packing.  
Rear external case  
Packing  
Screws  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 36  
UG420H-S  
1. With the main body turned over, remove the 6 screws from the outside case.  
Pu t a clot h or ot h er prot ect ive m at erial u n der t h e produ ct so as n ot t o  
dam age t h e display pan el.  
2. Remove the rear outside case.  
Rear outside case  
Screw  
3. Remove the connector for the backlight unit (CFL unit).  
4. Remove connector A.  
5. Remove connector B.  
Holdin g t h e con n ect or, carefu lly rem ove it wit h ou t pu llin g on t h e cable.  
* Properly mark connectors B and C so that they can be correctly reinserted in the proper place.  
Screw  
Inside case  
Ribbon cable  
Connector A  
Connector B  
Connector for  
backlight unit  
(CFL unit)  
Front outside case  
Screw  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 37  
6. Remove the two ribbon cables.  
Connector for ribbon cable  
Lock  
Connector for ribbon cable  
Ribbon cable  
Lock  
Slide the lock to unlock it.  
* The connector cannot be removed.  
Screw  
7. Remove the 6 screws that fix  
the inside case.  
Ribbon cable  
8. Remove the inside case from  
the front outside case.  
Inside case  
Front outside case  
Screw  
9. Put the inside case on the table, with the display panel up.  
10. Remove the 4 screws that fix the LCD module.  
11. Remove the LCD module from the inside case.  
LCD module  
Screw  
Inside case  
12. Put the LCD module on the table, with the display panel down.  
Pu t a clot h or ot h er prot ect ive m at erial u n der t h e produ ct so as n ot t o  
dam age t h e display pan el.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 38  
13. Pull out the backlight unit (CFL unit) to the left as shown in the figure below.  
* Pull up the locks indicated in the figure below to unlock them.  
Pull out to the left.  
Backlight unit (CFL unit)  
Pull out to the left  
LCD module (rear)  
Lock  
Backlight unit (CFL unit)  
LCD module  
14. Insert the new backlight unit (CFL unit).  
* Insert the new backlight unit until it locks completely.  
15. Put the LCD module on the table, with the display panel up.  
16. Mount the LCD module on the inside case.  
* Pass the cables through the inside case.  
Connector for backlight unit  
(CFL unit)  
Ribbon cable  
Connector A  
Connector B  
LCD module  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 39  
17. Set and tighten the 4 screws for securing the LCD module.  
LCD module  
Screw  
Inside case  
18. Put the inside case that has the LCD module mounted on it on the table, with the display panel down.  
Pu t a clot h or ot h er prot ect ive m at erial u n der t h e produ ct so as n ot t o  
dam age t h e display pan el.  
19. Mount the inside case on the front outside case.  
Be carefu l n ot t o allow du st or ot h er foreign m at t er t o en t er t h e gap  
bet ween t h e in side case an d t h e fron t ou t side case.  
* Insert the optical fiber cable in the “POWER” hole on the front outside case.  
Inside case  
Front outside case  
"POWER" hole  
Optical fiber cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 40  
20. Mount the 6 screws.  
21. Mount the connector for the backlight unit (CFL unit).  
22. Mount connector B.  
23. Mount connector A.  
Mak e su re t h at t h e con n ect ors are correct ly in sert ed in t h eir origin al  
places by u sin g t h e m ark s m ade before rem oval.  
24. Mount the 2 ribbon cables.  
Screw  
LCD module case  
Ribbon cable  
Connector A  
Connector B  
Connector for  
backlight unit  
(CFL unit)  
Front outside case  
Screw  
Lock  
Connector for ribbon cable  
Connector for ribbon cable  
Lock  
Ribbon cable  
With the ribbon cable inserted in the connector, slide the lock to lock it.  
25. Mount the rear outside case on the front outside case.  
*After fitting the rear outside case, firmly press the entire case body to fit the internal “POWER” board  
connector into the CPU board connector.  
26. Mount the 6 screws on the rear outside panel.  
Rear outside case  
Screw  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 41  
UG320  
UG320 Backlight Unit Replacement  
(Required Tool)  
Screwdriver  
Do n ot t ou ch cables an d boards t h at are n ot associat ed wit h back ligh t  
u n it replacem en t . Doin g so m ay resu lt in failu re.  
Wh en replacin g t h e back ligh t , t ak e appropriat e preven t ive m easu res  
again st st at ic elect ricit y.  
*
The point of measures against static electricity is to keep the entire workplace including humans at  
the same electric potential. Use an anti-static wristband or mat to prevent static electricity.  
1. Turn the POD over, and remove the 4 external screws.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
2. Remove the rear external case.  
Rear external case  
Screws  
3. Remove the connector A.  
4. Remove the connector B.  
5. Remove the connector C.  
Hold t h e con n ect or an d pu ll it ou t . Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable  
t h en .  
*
Leave position marks on the connectors B and C to check the positions when reattaching them.  
Rear external case  
Front external case  
Ribbon cable  
Connector B  
Connector C  
Connector A  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) connectors  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 42  
6. Disconnect the backlight unit (CFL unit) connector.  
Hold t h e con n ect or an d pu ll it ou t . Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable  
t h en .  
7. Remove the 2 screws fixing the board equipped with the backlight unit (CFL unit) connectors.  
8. Remove the board equipped with the backlight unit (CFL unit) connectors.  
9. Remove the two ribbon cables.  
Rear external case  
Front external case  
Ribbon cables  
Screw  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) connectors  
PC board  
Screw  
Ribbon cable connector  
Ribbon cable connector  
Lock  
Lock  
Ribbon cable  
Ribbon cable  
Slide the lock to release it.  
Slide t h e lock wit h t h e ribbon cable h oldin g down wit h you r fin gers.  
*
The connector and the lock are not removable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 43  
10. Remove the 3 screws fixing the inside case.  
Screws  
Screw  
Inside case  
LCD module  
Front external case  
11. Remove the inside case from the front external case.  
12. Place the inside case with the display panel side up.  
Tak e care n ot leave scrat ch es, fin gerprin t s, or dirt on t h e display pan el.  
13. Remove the 4 screws fixing the LCD module.  
LCD module  
Screws  
Inside case  
14. Remove the LCD module from the inside case.  
LCD module  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 44  
15. Place the LCD module with the display panel side down.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
16. Release the lock of the backlight unit (CFL unit). Remove the unit by pulling it up.  
LCD module (rear)  
Backlight units (CFL units)  
Lock  
Lock  
17. Attach a new backlight unit (CFL unit).  
*
Make sure that the lock is secured.  
Wh en t ak in g a n ew back ligh t u n it ou t of t h e bag, do n ot t wist or yan k on  
t h e cable.  
Backlight units (CFL units)  
LCD module (rear)  
18. Place the LCD module with the display panel side up.  
19. Attach the LCD module to the inside case.  
* Insert the connectors B and C into the inside case.  
LCD module  
Connector B  
Connector C  
Inside case  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 45  
20. Attach the 4 screws to fix the LCD module.  
Tighten one screw at the bottom right with an earth cable terminal.  
*
LCD module  
Screws  
Earth cable  
Inside case  
21. After attaching the LCD module to the inside case, place it with the display panel side down.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
22. Attach the inside case to the front external case.  
Do n ot allow t h e en t ry of du st or part icles t o t h e area bet ween t h e in side  
case an d t h e fron t ext ern al case.  
*
Insert the two ribbon cables into the inside case.  
Front external case  
Ribbon cables  
Ribbon cables  
Inside case  
Insert the fiber cable into the power connection hole.  
*
Fiber cable  
Power connection hole  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 46  
23. Attach the 3 screws.  
Inside case  
Screws  
Screw  
Front external case  
24. Attach the board equipped with the backlight unit (CFL unit) connectors.  
25. Attach the 2 screws to fix the board equipped with the backlight unit (CFL unit) connectors.  
26. Attach the backlight unit (CFL unit) connector.  
Screw  
Front external case  
Backlight unit  
Rear external case  
(CFL unit) connectors  
Screw  
Ribbon cables  
27. Attach the 2 ribbon cables.  
Lock  
Ribbon cable  
Ribbon cable connector  
Ribbon cable connector  
Lock  
Ribbon cable  
Insert the ribbon cable into the connector and slide the lock to set it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 47  
28. Attach the connector C.  
29. Attach the connector B.  
Ch eck t h e posit ion s of t h e con n ect ors wit h t h eir m ark s.  
30. Attach the connector A.  
Power supply board connector  
Rear external case  
Front external case  
CPU board connector  
Connector B  
Connector C  
Connector A  
Visu ally ch eck t h at all con n ect ors an d ribbon cables are con n ect ed se-  
cu rely.  
31. Attach the rear external case to the front external case.  
*
Fit the rear external case in position. Press the case entirely so as to fit the power supply board  
connector with the CPU board connector inside.  
32. Attach the external 4 screws.  
Rear external case  
Screws  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 48  
UG320HD  
UG320HD Backlight Unit Replacement  
(Required Tool)  
Screwdriver  
Do n ot t ou ch cables an d boards t h at are n ot associat ed wit h back ligh t  
u n it replacem en t . Doin g so m ay resu lt in failu re.  
Wh en replacin g t h e back ligh t , t ak e appropriat e preven t ive m easu res  
again st st at ic elect ricit y.  
*
The point of measures against static electricity is to keep the entire workplace including humans at  
the same electric potential. Use an anti-static wristband or mat to prevent static electricity.  
1. Turn the POD over, and remove the 9 external screws.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
Rear external case  
Screws  
2. Remove the rear external case.  
Do n ot rem ove t h e gask et .  
Connector D  
Front external case  
Connector A  
Connector B  
Connector E  
Connector C  
Gasket  
Ribbon cable  
Ribbon cable  
3. Remove the connectors A to E.  
Hold t h e con n ect or an d pu ll it ou t . Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable  
t h en .  
*
Leave position marks on the connectors B and C, A and D to check the positions when reattaching  
them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 49  
4. Remove the three ribbon cables.  
Ribbon cable connector  
Lock  
Ribbon cable connector  
Lock  
Ribbon cable  
Ribbon cable  
Slide the lock to release it.  
Slide t h e lock wit h t h e ribbon cable h oldin g down wit h you r fin gers.  
*
The connector and the lock are not removable.  
5. Remove the 4 screws fixing the CPU board.  
CPU board  
Screws  
6. Raise the CPU board vertically until it is removed.  
Tak e n ecessary m easu res t o prot ect t h e CPU board from st at ic elect ricit y.  
Screw  
Insulating seal  
Screw  
Connector  
Inverter board  
7. Remove the 2 insulating seals from the inverter board.  
8. Remove the connector from the inverter board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 50  
9. Remove the 2 screws fixing the inverter board.  
10. Remove the inverter board and detach two connectors from the backlight unit.  
Backlight units (CFL units) connector  
Backlight units (CFL units)  
11. Release the lock of the backlight unit (CFL unit). Remove the unit by pulling it up.  
Lock  
Lock  
12. Attach a new backlight unit (CFL unit).  
*
Make sure that the lock is secured.  
Wh en t ak in g a n ew back ligh t u n it ou t of t h e bag, do n ot t wist or yan k on  
t h e cable.  
13. Attach the backlight unit (CFL unit) connector to the inverter board.  
14. Attach the 2 screws to fix the inverter board.  
Screw  
ENB lamp hole  
Insulating seal  
Screw  
Power connection hole  
Connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 51  
15. Attach the connector to the inverter board.  
16. Attach the 2 insulating seals to places above the resistors between the coil and the connector on the  
inverter board.  
17. Attach the CPU board.  
In sert t h e LEDs in t o each h ole of t h e POWER lam p an d t h e ENB lam p.  
18. Attach the 4 screws to fix the CPU board.  
*
Tighten one screw at the bottom right with an earth cable terminal.  
Screws  
Earth cable  
19. Attach the 3 ribbon cables.  
Ribbon cable connector  
Lock  
Lock  
Ribbon cable connector  
Ribbon cable  
Ribbon cable  
Insert the ribbon cable into the connector and slide the lock to set it.  
Connector D  
Front external case  
Connector A  
Connector E  
Gasket  
Connector B  
Connector C  
Ribbon cable  
Ribbon cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 52  
20. Attach the connector A to E.  
Ch eck t h e posit ion s of t h e con n ect ors wit h t h eir m ark s.  
21. Visually check that all connectors and ribbon cables are connected securely.  
22. Attach the rear external case to the front external case.  
23. Attach the external 9 screws.  
Rear external case  
Screws  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 53  
UG220  
UG220 backlight unit replacemect.  
Do n ot t ou ch cables an d boards t h at are n ot associat ed wit h back ligh t  
u n it replacem en t . Doin g so m ay resu lt in failu re.  
1. Turn the backlight unit upside down. Remove the 4 external screws.  
Place it on a clot h , et c. t o prot ect t h e display pan el from scrat ch es.  
2. Remove the rear external case.  
3. Disconnect the backlight unit (CFL unit) connector.  
Rear external case  
Screws  
Hold t h e con n ect or an d pu ll it ou t . Do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e cable  
t h en  
Rear external case  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) connector  
Front external case  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 54  
4. Remove the screw fixing the backlight unit (CFL unit).  
Backlight unit (CFL unit)  
Screw  
5. Raise the backlight unit (CFL unit) once and remove the unit by sliding it horizontally.  
Wh ile raisin g t h e back ligh t u n it , do n ot t wist or yan k on t h e  
cable.  
Backlight unit (CFL unit)  
6. Attach a new backlight unit (CFL unit).  
Wh en t ak in g a n ew back ligh t u n it ou t of t h e bag, do n ot t wist or  
yan k on t h e cable.  
7. Attach the screw to fix the backlight unit (CFL unit).  
8. Connect the backlight unit (CFL unit) connector.  
Backlight unit (CFL unit)  
Screw  
Backlight unit (CFL unit) connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 How to Replace the Backlight Unit  
3 - 55  
Visu ally ch eck t h at all con n ect ors an d ribbon cables are con n ect ed se-  
cu rely.  
9. Attach the rear external case to the front external case.  
*
Fit the rear external case in position. Press the case entirely so as to fit the power supply board  
connector with the CPU board connector inside.  
Do n ot allow t h e cable t o be cau gh t in t h e area bet ween t h e cases.  
Rear external case  
Power supply board connector  
Front external case  
CPU board connector  
10. Attach the external 4 screws.  
Rear external case  
Screws  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
La d d e r Tra nsfe r Func tio n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix - 1  
La d d e r Tra nsfe r Func tion  
(Tra nsp a re nt Mo d e )  
Up until now it was necessary to debug the data by removing and mounting "connection cable between PC  
and PLC" and "connection cable between POD and PLC." When using the ladder transfer function, it is  
possible to write ladder programs or monitor the PLC memory via POD connected to PC without removing  
and mounting each cable.  
Applicable PLC  
Select PLC Type  
QnH(Q) series CPU  
QnH(Q) series link  
FX series CPU  
CPU  
Q02(H), Q06H  
Q00, Q01  
Ladder comm. prg  
MelQHCpQ.lcm  
MelQnA.lcm  
I/F DRV  
MelQHCpQ.tpb (1.240)  
MelQnA.tpb (1.300)  
FX1/2, FX0N  
FX2N/1N , FX2NC  
FX1S  
FX2N series CPU  
FX1S series CPU  
MelFx.lcm  
MelFx.tpb (1.300)  
Applicable Types  
• UG221, UG320, UG420, UG520, UG420H-E  
* This function cannot be supported with 1:n communication (multi-drop), multi-link and multi-link2  
communication.  
• The following types are unavailable for this function.  
UG220, UG320HD  
Version an d Main Men u Screen  
Available versions are as follows. The information can be shown on the [Main Menu] screen.  
Version  
ITEM  
SYSTEM PROG.  
FONT  
VER.1.280 or later  
Main Menu  
UG420H-TC1  
1998- 9-  
1
07  
:
23 : 30  
System Information  
VER.1.210/1.130/1.000 or later  
FONT  
VER.1.000/1.000/1.000  
JAPANESE 32  
I/F DRV VER. 1.000  
MELSEC AnA/N/U  
SYSTEM PROG. VER.1.000  
Screen Data  
PLC Type: MITSUBISHIAnA/N/U series  
Comment:  
Information  
Error: Stop  
Time-Out: 0.50 sec  
Size  
:
786432  
Retry:  
3
Connection:  
Signal Level: RS232C  
PLC Stat.No.:  
1
:
1
Baud Rate: 19200  
Data Length:  
Stop Bit:  
7
1
0
Parity: Even  
Send Delay: 0msec  
Extension  
I/O Test  
Extension Program Info.  
Main Menu  
Editor : MJ1  
Memory-Card  
Ladder Comm. Program  
VER. 1.000 MELSEC QnH  
CPU Port  
Q
Pressing the [Extension] switch brings to the  
[Extension Program Info.] screen.  
Editor:-  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix-2  
Con n ect ion  
• Use each 1:1 communication cable when connecting the POD (CN1) to the PLC (CPU port).  
• Use FUJI Electrics' UG00C-T cable when connecting the computer (PLC programming software) and  
the POD(MJ1/2).  
1:1 communication cable  
UG00C-T  
disc  
SYSTEM  
MELSEC  
CN1  
COM  
CPU port  
MJ1/2  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
GPPW  
(UG00S-CW)  
POD  
RESET  
POWER  
UG20 series  
MITSUBISHI QnH/FX series  
Computer (PC)  
Communications between the comuputer and the PLC  
Communications between the POD and the PLC  
• When using the UG00S-CW editor and the PLC programming software:  
When using two UG00C-T cables:  
When the computer has two COM ports, use one port for the UG00S-CW editor and the other port  
for the PLC programming software. Use the UG00C-T cables. (It is not possible to transfer the  
UG00S-CW editor and the PLC programming software at the same time.)  
Communications between the PLC programming  
software and the PLC  
Communications between the UG00S-CW and POD  
Communications between POD and the PLC  
1:1 communication cable  
UG00C-T  
disc  
MELSEC  
CN1  
CPU port  
COM1  
COM2  
SYSTEM  
MJ1  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
GPPW  
(UG00S-CW)  
POD  
RESET  
POWER  
MJ2  
MITSUBISHI QnH/FX series  
Computer (PC)  
UG20 series  
UG00C-T  
When using one UG00C-T cable:  
When using the UG00S-CW editor and the PLC programming software, it is not possible to use  
one COM port for both purposes at the same time. Stop using both software for communications.  
1:1 communication cable  
UG00C-T  
SYSTEM  
disc  
MELSEC  
COM1  
CN1  
MJ1  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
CPU port  
GPPW  
(UG00S-CW)  
POD  
RESET  
POWER  
MITSUBISHI QnH/FX series  
Computer (PC)  
UG20 series  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix - 3  
Set t in gs an d Com m u n icat ion s  
1. PLC type setting  
Select [PLC Type] from the [System Setting] menu. Select a plc type available for the ladder transfer  
function in the [Select PLC Type] dialog.  
2. PLC programming software port setting  
Select [Modular Jack] from the [System Setting] menu.  
Select [Ladder Tool] for [Modular Jack 1] or [Modular Jack  
2] in the [Modular Jack] dialog.  
Com m u n icat ion s wit h UG0 0 S-CW edit or (for screen dat a t ran sfer)  
On -lin e ed it in g bet ween t h e UG0 0 S-CW ed it or an d t h e POD is n ot p ossible.  
If at t em p t ed , com m u n icat ion s bet ween t h e PLC p rogram m in g soft ware an d t h e PLC will  
n ot be p erform ed correct ly.  
• With [Ladder Tool] selected for [Modular Jack 2], MJ1 will be [Editor Port] when the Main Menu screen  
is displayed on the POD, and communications with the UG00S-CW editor become possible.  
• With [Ladder Tool] selected for [Modular Jack 1], even when the Main Menu screen is displayed on  
the POD, communications with the PLC programming software continue so that communications with  
the UG00S-CW editor are not available.  
When communicating with the UG00S-CW editor, refer to the following two ways.  
* When UG420H-E is used, selected the way of Automatic switching after upgrading system  
prg. of U420E.  
Automatic switching (UG00S-CW ver.3.0.9.0 or later, sys. prg. ver.1.350 or later)  
Check [Ladder communication is not used in Local mode.] on the [Environment Setting] tab menu  
of the [Unit Setting] dialog in the [System Setting.].  
Manual switching  
Hold down the F2 switch for three  
seconds. [Editor: ...] changes to  
[Editor: MJ1] and communications  
with the UG00S-CW editor become  
possible.  
Communications with  
the PLC programming  
software possible  
Communications with  
the UG00S-CW editor possible  
Editor:MJ1  
Editor:  
When the F2 switch is held down for  
three seconds, [Editor: MJ1] changes  
to [Editor: ...] and communications  
with the PLC programming software  
become possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix-4  
• Communicating statuses with the PLC programming software and the PLC during communications  
between the UG00S-CW editor and the POD  
UG00S-CW  
PLC programming software  
Writing to POD  
Communications disconnected  
(normal communications on completion of writing)  
Normal communications  
Reading from POD  
Comparing with POD Normal communications  
3. PLC programming software communication setting  
For communication specifications between the PLC programming software and the PLC, the communi-  
cation parameter settings for the POD and the PLC can be used. Select [Comm. Parameter] from the  
[System Setting] menu and check the settings in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog.  
<Baud rate setting>  
There will be no problem if the setting for [Baud Rate] in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog of the  
UG00S-CW editor is not consistent with the baud rate setting on the PLC programming software.  
The baud rate set on the PLC programming software is automatically selected when communica-  
tions (monitoring, etc.) are performed. When the POD is turned off and back on, the setting for  
[Baud Rate] in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog becomes valid again.  
* Setting the same baud rate of both PLC and POD makes the performance of POD faster.  
4. Transferring the ladder communication program  
When transferring screen data, the ladder communication program is also transferred. To transfer the  
ladder communication program only, follow the procedure described below.  
i) Select [Ladder com. prg.] in the [Transfer] dialog, and click [PC->].  
ii) The dialog shown on the right is displayed. Select the ladder com. program for the selected plc  
type and click [Open]. The program is transferred to the POD.  
Not es on Ladder Tran sfer Fu n ct ion  
1. When [Ladder Tool] is selected for a modular jack, monitor registration on the PLC is prohibited so that  
the screen display speed becomes slower than usual during communications between the POD and the  
PLC even if the PLC programming software is not started.  
2. Also, when the ladder program is transferred in the RUN mode of the POD, communications are  
synchronized; therefore, the performance of both the POD and the PLC programming software de-  
creases.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.  
ED & C . Drive Systems Company  
Gate City Ohsaki, East Tower  
11-2, Osaki 1-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo, 141-0032, Japan  
Phone:  
Fax:  
URL:  
+81-3-5435-7135 , 7136 , 7137 , 7138  
+81-3-5435-7456 , 7457 , 7458 , 7459  
http://www.fujielectric.co.jp/kiki/  
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.  
2003-6(PDF)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Echo Blower PB 410 User Manual
Echo Edger PE 265 User Manual
Electro Voice Musical Instrument Amplifier DH2A User Manual
Federal Security Camera Speaker 300GC User Manual
Fisher Price Baby Toy H1616 User Manual
Fisher Price Bicycle N6021 User Manual
FujiFilm Digital Camera 16000480 User Manual
Fujitsu PDAs Smartphones 4XX User Manual
GE Convection Oven JTP70SMSS User Manual
GE Washer WWA8800M User Manual